ETC 7PV

7
Monitoring and
Control Devices
7/5
7/26
7/35
7/40
7/41
7/42
7/43
IK PI1)
IK PI1)
IK PI1)
IK PI1)
7/44
7/45
7/49
7/55
7/58
7/60
7/63
7/69
7/73
7/76
7/78
7/80
7/82
7/85
7/87
7/90
7/92
7/94
7/96
Introduction
7/102
7/105
7/108
Ch. 6
3TK28 Safety Relays
With electronic enabling circuits
With relay enabling circuits
With contactor relay enabling circuits
3RA71 load feeders
with integrated safety functions
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor
Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor
management and control devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor protection
Interface Converters
and control devices
7/112
3RS17
interface converters
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
3UL22 summation current
1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005
transformers
"Industrial Communication for
LOGO! Logic Modules
Automation and Drives"
General data
LOGO! Modular basic variants
LOGO! Modular pure variants
LOGO! Modular extension modules
LOGO! Modular communications
modules
AS-Interface connection for LOGO!
LOGO!Contact
LOGO! Software
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
General data
3RP15 timing relays
in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
7PV timing relays for panel mounting
3RT19 timing relays
for mounting to contactors
7
7/2
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays
for Electrical and Additional
Measurements
Line monitoring
Voltage monitoring
Current monitoring
Power factor monitoring
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded AC networks
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded DC networks
Level monitoring
Speed monitoring
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring
Relays
General data
Relays, analog adjustable
Relays, digitally adjustable to
DIN 3440
Relays, digitally adjustable
for up to 3 sensors
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring and Control Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
The advantages at a glance
3UF7
3UF5
6ED1 052
Order No.
Page
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
• Compact, modular design
3UF7
• Unique flexibility in terms of functionality and hardware
3UF5
configuration
• Wide functional range from the distributed I/O system to the
autonomous motor management system
• All control functions from the direct starter to the polechanging switch with reversing contactor
• All motor sizes
• Integration in all PROFIBUS-capable automation systems
• Application in low-voltage controlgear for motor control
centers on the process industry
• Increases plant availability
• Saves costs during construction, commissioning and
operation of the plant
• Extensive data of the motor feeder available everywhere on
the PROFIBUS
• All protection, monitoring and control functions for the motor
feeder in a single system
7/5
7/26
3UF18 current transformers for overload
protection
• Protection converter for activating overload relays or for use
with SIMOCODE pro
• Ensures proportional current transfer up to a multiple of the
primary rated current
3UF18
7/35
3UL22 summation current transformers
• Senses fault currents in machines and plants
• Senses ground fault currents
3UL22
7/40
LOGO! logic modules
• Compact, user-friendly and low-cost solution for simple
control tasks
• Universal:
- Building installation and wiring (lighting, shutters,
awnings, doors, access control, barriers, ventilation
systems ...)
- Control cabinet installation
- Machine and device construction (pumps, small presses,
compressors, hydraulic lifts, conveyors ...)
- Special controls for conservatories and greenhouses
- Signal preprocessing for other controllers
• Flexible expansion depending on the application
LOGO! Modular basic variants
• With display, pushbuttons and an interface for connecting
extension modules
6ED1 052-1
7/42
LOGO! Modular pure variants
• Without display and pushbuttons but with an interface for
connecting extension modules
6ED1 052-2
7/43
LOGO! Modular extension modules
• For connection to LOGO! Modular basic variants with
digital inputs and outputs or analog inputs and outputs
6ED1 055-1
IK PI1)
LOGO! Modular communications modules
• For integrating LOGO! in an instabus KNX EIB system or as 3RK1 400
an AS-Interface slave
IK PI1)
LOGO!Power
• Power supply for converting the supply voltage of
100 ... 240 V AC into an operational voltage of 24 V DC or
12 V DC
6EP1 3
IK PI1)
LOGO!Contact
• Switching module for switching resistive loads and motors
directly
6ED1 057-4
IK PI1)
LOGO! Software
• For switchgear program generation on the PC
6ED1 058
7/44
7
LOGO! logic modules
1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005 "Industrial Communication for Automation and
Drives"
7/2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring and Control Devices
Introduction
The advantages at a glance
3RP
7PV
3UG45 11
3UG46 14
Order No.
Page
3RP, 7PV timing relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
• Low-cost solution with monofunctions such as response
delay, off-delay, clock-pulse, wye-delta function and
multifunction
• Wide-range voltage designs
3RP15
7/49
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
• The solution for small mounting depths
• The low mounting height reduces the tier spacing
3RP20
7/55
7PV timing relays for panel mounting
• Digital variant
7PV
7/58
3RT19
7/60
3RT19 timing relays for mounting onto contactors • Saves space because the relay is mounted onto the
contactor
• Wiring advantages thanks to direct contacting
with contactor
3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements
Line monitoring
Phase sequence
• Low-cost solution for monitoring the phase sequence
3UG45 11
7/63
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
3UG45 12
7/63
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance
and undervoltage
• Analog adjustable
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
3UG45 13
7/64
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of
ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
3UG46 14
7/64
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of
ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
3UG46 15
7/65
3UG46 16
7/65
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in
case of wrong phase sequence, phase failure,
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage
3UG46 17
7/65
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in
case of wrong phase sequence, phase and
N conductor failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage
and undervoltage
3UG46 18
7/65
3UG46 33
7/69
3UG46 31/32
7/70
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of
ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide measuring ranges
• Variant for wide voltage range
3UG46 21/22
7/73
• Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted
separately
3UG30 14
7/76
3UG30 81,
3UG30 82
7/78
3UG35 01
7/82
Together with a sensor for monitoring continuous pulses
3UG30 51
With or without memory
Adjustable ON delay
1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts
Hard gold-plated contacts in combination and wide voltage
range versions
7/85
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance
and overvoltage and undervoltage
Phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure,
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage
Voltage monitoring with internal power supply for • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of
overvoltage and undervoltage
ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide measuring ranges
Voltage monitoring with auxiliary voltage for
• Variant for wide voltage range
overvoltage and undervoltage
7
Voltage monitoring
Current monitoring
Current monitoring with auxiliary voltage for
overvoltage and undervoltage
Power factor monitoring (motor load monitoring)
Monitoring relay for overshoot and undershoot
monitoring with internal power supply
(window monitoring)
Insulation resistance
Monitoring of the insulation resistance for
• Test button
ungrounded AC or DC networks from 10 ... 110 kW • With or without memory
• Switchable measuring range
Level monitoring
Fill level and resistance
• As single-step or two-step controls for inlet or outlet
monitoring of conducting liquids or as
resistance threshold switch
• Variable, wide range from 5 ... 100 kW
• UNDER/OVER adjustable
Speed monitoring
Underspeed monitoring
•
•
•
•
•
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/3
Monitoring and Control Devices
Introduction
The advantages at a glance
3RS10
3RN1
3TK28
3RS17
Order No.
Page
3RS10,
3RS11
7/90
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays
For monitoring the temperatures of solids, liquids, and gases
Relays, analog adjustable
•
•
•
•
Separate versions for overshoot and undershoot
For simple monitoring tasks
For PT100 or thermoelements J and K
Variable hysteresis
Relays, digitally adjustable acc. to DIN 3440
• For two-step or three-step controls
• For monitoring heat generation plants
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC or thermoelements
type J, K, T, E, N, R, S, B
3RS10,
3RS11,
3RS20
7/92
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
3RS10
• For simultaneously monitoring several sensors
• Especially suited for monitoring motor winding temperatures
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC
7/94
• Relays for monitoring motor winding temperatures with
3RN1
type A PTC sensors
• Integrated with ATEX license
• Closed-circuit principle
• Depending on the version: With short-circuit and open-circuit
detection, zero voltage safety, manual/auto/remote RESET,
1 CO, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 CO, 1 NO + 1 CO or 2 CO
hard gold-plated
7/96
With electronic enabling circuits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Permanent function checking
No wear because switched electronically
High switching frequency
Long electrical endurance
Evaluation of solid-state sensors
Sensor lead up to max. 2000 m
Cascading possible
Insensitive to vibrations and dirt
Compact design, low weight
Approved for the world market
3TK28 4
7/102
With relay enabling circuits
•
•
•
•
Compact design
Floating safe outputs
Also suitable for press and punch controls
Can be used up to an ambient temperature of max. 70 °C
3TK28 2, 3TK28 3
7/105
With contactor relay enabling circuits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3TK28 5
Floating enabling circuits
AC-15/DC-13 switching capacity
Safe isolation
Long mechanical and electrical endurance
Certified as a complete unit
Fault minimization and cost reduction through factory wiring
Low installation costs
7/108
3RA71 load feeders
with integrated safety functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available in fused or fuseless configuration
Floating enabling circuits
AC-1/AC-3 switching capacity
Certified as a complete unit
Long mechanical and electrical endurance
Rated operational voltage up to 690 V
Safe isolation
3TK28 5
Ch. 6
3RS17
7/112
3RN1 thermistor motor protection
For PTC sensors
7
3TK28 safety relays
3RS17 interface converters
Converters for standard signals and
non-standard variables
7/4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
• All terminals protected against polarity reversing and
overvoltage up to 30 V
• For electrical isolation and conversion of analog signals
• Short-circuit resistant outputs
• From 6.2 mm width
• Switchable multi-range converters
• Variants with manual/automatic switch for setpoint input or
for the conversion of analog variables into frequency
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage performance range. It optimizes the connection between I&C and
motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows significant
savings to be made for startup, operation and maintenance of a
system.
When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear
cabinet, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level
automation system and the motor feeder and includes the
following:
• Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is
independent of the automation system
• Flexible software instead of hardware for the motor control
• Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard for
fieldbus systems
■ Design
General
SIMOCODE pro is a modularly constructed motor management
system which is subdivided into two device series with different
functional scopes:
• SIMOCODE pro C
• SIMOCODE pro V
Both series (systems) are made up of different hardware
components (modules):
System
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Modules
• Basic unit 1
• Current measuring module
• Basic unit 2
• Current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring
voltage
• Operator panel (optional)
• Expansion modules
(optional)
• Operator panel (optional)
Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and
one separate current measuring module. The two modules are
connected together electrically through the system interface
with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically
connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side
by side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for
the choice of current measuring module.
An operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is
optionally connectable through a second system interface on
the basic unit. Both the current measurement module and the
operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through
the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be
added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of optional
expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs
already existing on the basic unit.
All modules are connected together by connection cables.
The connection cables are available in various lengths. The
maximum distance between the modules (e.g. between the
basic unit and the current measurement module) must not
exceed 2 m. The total length of all the connection cables in a
single system must not be more than 3 m.
SIMOCODE pro designed for mixed operation
Depending on functional requirements, the two systems can be
used simultaneously without any problems and without any additional outlay in a low-voltage system. SIMOCODE pro C is fully
upward-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. The same components are used. The parameterization of SIMOCODE pro C can
be transferred without any problems. Both systems have the
same removable terminals and the same terminal designations.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/5
7
■ Overview
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1
SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2
The compact system for
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)
with up to 4 binary inputs, up to 3 monostable relay outputs and
one thermistor connection (binary PTC)
The variable system which offers all SIMOCODE pro C functions
plus many additional functions. Basic unit 2 supports the
following control functions:
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters
• Star/delta starters, also with direction reversal
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing
switch); also with direction reversal
• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings (also
with direction reversal)
• Slide control
• Solenoid valve actuation
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)
• Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal)
The basic unit 1 is available in two different variants for the
following supply voltages:
• 24 V DC
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
Basic unit 2 has 4 binary inputs, 3 monostable relay outputs and
one thermistor connection (binary PTC). The type and number of
inputs and outputs can be increased by means of additional
expansion modules.
Basic unit 2 is available in two different variants for the following
supply voltages:
• 24 V DC
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1
Inputs:
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC
Outputs:
• 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs
7
Thermistor connection for binary PTC
PROFIBUS interface:
• 9-pole SUB-D or
• Terminal connection
Connection of the supply voltage:
• 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
Test/Reset button
SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2
Inputs:
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC
Outputs:
• 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs
3 LEDs
2 system interfaces for connection of
• a current measuring module and
• an operator panel
Basic unit 1 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate.
Thermistor connection for binary PTC
PROFIBUS interface:
• 9-pole SUB-D or
• Terminal connection
Connection of the supply voltage:
• 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
Test/Reset button
3 LEDs
7/6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
2 system interfaces for connection of
• a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• expansion modules and
• an operator panel
Basic unit 2 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate.
Current measuring modules (current ranges)
The current measurement module is selected for each feeder
according to the rated motor current to be monitored. Various
current measurement modules for current ranges from 0.3 to
630 A are available for this purpose. The current measurement
module is connected to the basic unit by a connection cable and
is supplied with electricity by the basic unit through this connection cable. Current measurement modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate by means of additional push-in lugs. Similarly,
current measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted
on standard mounting rails or be fixed directly to mounting
plates by means of fixtures integrated in the housing. Finally, current measuring modules up to 630 A can only be mounted with
the integrated screw fixtures.
Note:
Current measuring modules for up to 100 A set current can be
mechanically connected to the corresponding basic unit and
mounted with it as a unit (one behind the other). For larger
current measuring modules, only separate mounting is possible.
Current measuring modules for the following current ranges are
offered:
• 0.3 ... 3 A with straight-through current transformer
• 2.4 ... 25 A with straight-through current transformer
• 10 ... 100 A with straight-through current transformer
• 20 ... 200 A with straight-through current transformer or
busbar connection
• 63 ... 630 A with busbar connection
For motor currents up to 820 A, a current measuring module for
0.3 ... 3 A, for example, can be used in combination with a
3UF1 8 interposing/current transformer.
Current/voltage measuring modules (voltage range)
Current/voltage measuring modules have the same functions as
the current measuring modules. However, they can only be used
in combination with basic unit 2. They offer the same current
ranges for the rated motor current. Mounting on standard mounting rails, on mounting plates or directly on the contactor is also
the same as with the current measuring modules. They can also
measure voltages up to 690 V in the main circuit, which is necessary for calculating or monitoring power-related measured
variables. Current/voltage measuring modules have additional
removable terminals, to which the voltages of all three phases of
the main circuit are connected (3-pole). An additional 3-core
cable can be used, for example, to directly connect the main circuit from the busbar terminals of the current/voltage measuring
modules to the voltage measuring terminals.
Note:
Current/voltage measuring modules can only be mounted
separately from the associated basic unit 2. A current/voltage
measuring module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product
version E02 and later (from April 2005).
Width
45 mm
55 mm
120 mm
145 mm
7
Current measuring
modules
Current/voltage
measuring modules
Set current
0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A
10 ... 100 A
20 ... 200 A
63 ... 630 A
Straight-through transformers
Busbar connection
To measure and monitor
motor currents up to
820 A, matching 3UF18
interposing current
transformers are available for the current measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring modules.
Sizes and set current of the current measuring modules and the current/voltage measuring modules
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/7
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Operator panel
The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can
replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save
space. This means that SIMOCODE pro or the feeder can be
operated directly at the control cabinet and that the system
interface is connected externally for easier parameterization or
diagnostics using a PC/PG, for example.
Expansion with additional binary I/Os through digital
modules
The operator panel has 5 freely assignable buttons and a total of
10 LEDs, of which 7 LEDs can be used as required and
assigned to any status signal.
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary
inputs and relay outputs to basic unit 2. The input circuits of the
digital modules are supplied from an external power supply. The
following variants are available:
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 monostable
relay outputs
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2
monostable relay outputs
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 bistable
relay outputs
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2
bistable relay outputs
A PC/PG can be connected to the front system interface over the
PC cable.
Up to two digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2.
All variants can be combined with each other.
The operator panel is connected to the basic unit over a
connection cable from its rear system interface and is supplied
electrically from the basic unit.
The operator panel is mounted in the control cabinet door or the
front plate of, for example, a withdrawable unit and satisfies IP54
degree of protection with the system interface covered.
Operator panel for SIMOCODE pro
•
•
•
•
•
10 LEDs
Labeling strips
Test/reset button
4 control keys
2 system interfaces on the front with interface covers
7
Expansion modules for additional I/Os and functions
With basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V), it is possible to expand the
number and type of inputs and outputs in order to implement
additional functions, for example. Each expansion module has
two system interfaces on the front. Through the one system
interface the expansion module is connected to the system
interface of basic unit 2 using a connection cable, for example;
through the second system interface, further expansion modules
or the operator panel can be connected. The power supply for
the expansion modules is provided by the connection cable
through basic unit 2.
All expansion modules are suitable for rail mounting or can be
directly fixed to a mounting plate using additional plug-in lugs.
Basic unit 2 can be extended on the whole with up to 5
expansion modules.
7/8
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
3UF7 300-1AB00-0 (left) and 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 (right) digital modules
4 binary inputs, externally supplied with
• 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
2 relay outputs,
• monostable or
• bistable (the switching status of the relay outputs is also
maintained following failure of the supply voltage on basic
unit 2)
1 Ready LED
2 system interfaces for connection
• to basic unit 2
• of expansion modules
• of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• of an operator panel
Note:
For the implementation of some motor control functions, in
addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2, at least one further
digital module is required.
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Expansion with a ground fault measuring module with an
external summation current transformer
Expansion of analog temperature monitoring with a
temperature module
Instead of ground fault monitoring using the current measuring
modules or current/voltage measuring modules, it may be
necessary, especially in high-impedance grounded networks, to
implement ground fault monitoring for smaller ground fault
currents using a summation current transformer. A ground fault
module can be used to add an additional input to basic unit 2 for
connection of a summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A).
Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the basic
units, up to 3 analog temperature sensors can be evaluated
using a temperature module.
The temperatures measured here can be completely integrated
in the process, monitored and supplied to a higher-level
automation system. The temperature module can be used, for
example, for analog monitoring of the temperature of the motor
windings or bearings or for monitoring the coolant or gear oil
temperature. Various sensor types are supported (resistance
sensors) for use in solid, liquid or gaseous media:
• PT100/PT1000
• KTY83/KTY84
• NTC
Maximum one ground fault module can be connected to one
basic unit 2.
Maximum one temperature module can be connected to one
basic unit 2. The same sensor type must be used in all sensor
measuring circuits.
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground fault module
1 input for connecting a summation current transformer
(3UL2 20.-.A)
1 Ready LED
Note:
A ground fault module can only be used with a basic unit 2,
product version E02 and later (from April 2005).
3UF7 700-1AA00-0 temperature module
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 resistance sensors in 2-wire or
3-wire circuits
1 Ready LED
2 system interfaces for connection
• To basic unit 2
• Of expansion modules
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• Of an operator panel
Note:
A temperature module can only be used with a basic unit 2,
product version E02 and later (from April 2005).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/9
7
2 system interfaces for connection
• To basic unit 2
• Of expansion modules
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• Of an operator panel
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Expansion with additional inputs/outputs by means of an
analog module
Basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded with analog inputs and
outputs (0/4 ... 20 mA) by means of the analog module. It is then
possible to measure and monitor any process variable that can
be mapped on a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal. Typical applications are,
for example, level monitoring for the implementation of dry running protection for pumps or monitoring the degree of pollution
of a filter using a differential pressure transducer. In this case the
automation system has free access to the measured process
variables. The analog output can be used, for example, to visualize process variables on a pointer instrument. The automation
system also has free access to the output.
Maximum one analog module can be connected to one basic
unit 2. Both inputs are set to a measuring range of either
0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA.
Safe isolation
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other
in according to IEC 60947-1. That is, they are designed with
double creepage and air distances. In the event of a fault,
therefore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring
circuits. The instructions of test report No. 2668 must be
complied with.
EEx e and EEx d types of protection
The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of
the SIMOCODE pro system comply with the requirements for
overload protection of explosion-protected motors to the degree
of protection:
• EEx d "flameproof enclosure" e.g. according to EN 50018 or
EN 60079-1
• EEx e "increased safety" e.g. according to EN 50019 or
EN 60079-7
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control
voltage, electrical isolation must be ensured using a battery or a
safety transformer according to EN 61558-2-6.
EC type test certificate: BVS 04 ATEX F 003
Test log: BVS PP 05.2029 EG.
3UF7 400-1AA00-0 analog module
Inputs:
• 2 inputs for measuring 0/4 ... 20 mA signals
Outputs:
• 1 output to output a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal
7
1 Ready LED
2 system interfaces for connection
• To basic unit 2
• Of expansion modules
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• Of an operator panel
Note:
An analog module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product
version E02 and later (from April 2005).
7/10
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
■ Function
Current-dependent electronic overload protection with
adjustable tripping characteristics (Classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
35 and 40)
• SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors according
to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements. The trip class can be adjusted
in eight steps from Class 5 to Class 40. In this way, the break
time can be adapted very accurately to the load torque which
allows the motor to be utilized more effectively. In addition, the
time until the overload tripping operation is performed is
calculated and can be made available to the I&C system. After
an overload tripping operation, the remaining cooling time can
be displayed (characteristic curves for 2-pole and 3-pole
loading in SIMOCODE pro System Manual).
Phase failure/unbalance protection
• The level of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the I&C system. If a specified limit value is violated,
a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the
phase unbalance is larger than 50 %, the tripping time is also
automatically reduced according to the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors increases in unbalanced conditions.
Stall protection
• If the motor current rises above an adjustable blocking
threshold (current threshold), a defined and delayable
response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case,
for example, the motor can be shut down independent of the
overload protection. The blocking protection is only enabled
after the configured class time has elapsed and avoids
unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as
wear of the motor.
Thermistor motor protection
• This protection function is based on direct temperature
measurements by means of temperature sensors in the stator
windings or in the enclosure of the motor. These protective
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or
braking operation, but also in the case of speeds lower than
the rated speed. SIMOCODE pro supports connection and
evaluation of several PTC sensors connected in series on the
basic unit. In addition, the sensor measuring circuit can be
monitored for short-circuits and wire breakages. If the
temperature of the motor increases beyond a defined limit or
if there is a fault in the sensor measuring circuit, a defined
response can be configured.
Ground-fault monitoring (internally) with a current measuring
module or current/voltage measuring module
• SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase
currents. With vector addition of the phase currents, the motor
feeder can be monitored for possible fault currents or ground
faults with the help of internal calculations. Internal earth fault
monitoring is only available for motors with three-phase
connections in directly grounded networks or in networks
grounded with low impedance. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected can be
parameterized and delayed as required.
Ground-fault monitoring (external) with summation current
transformer1)2)
• External ground-fault monitoring is normally implemented for
networks that are grounded with high impedance. Using an
additional summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A), even
extremely low ground-fault currents can be measured. The
response of SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected
can be parameterized and delayed as required. Fault current
measurement is performed for each summation current
transformer for the following fault currents: 0.3/0.5/1 A
Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current
• Current limit value monitoring is used for process monitoring
independent of overload protection. Violation of a current limit
value below the overload threshold can be an indication for a
dirty filter in a pump or for an increasingly sluggish motor
bearing, for example. Violation of the lower current limit value
can be a first indication of a worn drive belt. SIMOCODE pro
supports two-step monitoring of the motor current for freely
selectable upper and lower current limit values. The response
of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
Voltage monitoring3)
• By measuring the voltage directly at the circuit-breaker or at
the fuses in the main circuit, even when the motor is
deactivated, SIMOCODE pro can also obtain information
about the reclosing capability of the feeder and signal it if
required.
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage undervoltage monitoring
for freely selectable limit values. The response of
SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
Monitoring the active power3)
• The active power characteristic of a motor provides an
accurate statement of the actual loading over the complete
range. Excessive loading will cause increased wear in the
motor and can result in early failure. Insufficient active power
can be an indication of, for example, motor idling.
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the active
power for freely selectable upper and lower current limit
values. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely
configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping
threshold.
Monitoring the power factor3)
• Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the
power factor varies more than the motor current or active
power. Monitoring of the power factor is therefore particularly
useful for distinguishing between motor idling and fault events
such as a tear in a drive belt or a crack in a drive shaft.
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of power
factor undershoot for freely selectable limit values. The
response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and
delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
Temperature monitoring1)4)
• The temperature can be monitored, for example, in the motor
windings or at the bearings through up to three resistance
sensors connected to the temperature module.
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of overheating
for freely selectable limit values. The response of
SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold. Temperature
monitoring is always performed with reference to the highest
temperature of all sensor measuring circuits used.
1) Using basic unit 2.
2) An additional ground-fault module with a 3UL22 summation current
transformer is required.
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.
4) An additional temperature module is required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/11
7
Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Monitoring additional process variables over analog inputs
(0/4 ... 20 mA)1)2)
• The analog module enables SIMOCODE pro to measure
additional process variables and monitor them. A pump can,
for example, be protected against dry running in this manner
with level monitoring or the degree of pollution of a filter can
be measured using a differential pressure transducer. When a
specified level is undershot, the pump can be deactivated
and when a specified differential pressure is overshot, the filter
can be cleaned.
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the corresponding process variable for freely selectable upper and
lower current limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro
can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or
tripping threshold.
Phase sequence detection3)
• By detecting the phase sequence, SIMOCODE pro is able to
make a statement about the direction of rotation of a motor. If
the direction is incorrect, this can be reported or it can result
in immediate shutdown of the affected motor.
Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts
• In order to prevent plant downtime caused by motor failure
due to excessive motor operating times (wear) or excessive
motor downtimes, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating
hours and downtime of a motor. When an adjustable limit value
is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can
indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or
replaced. After the motor has been replaced, the operating
hours and downtimes can be reset, for example.
• To avoid excessive thermal loads and early wear of the motor,
it is possible to limit the number of motor startups for a
specifiable period. Alarms can indicate that only a small
number of possible starts remain.
7
Flexible motor control implemented with software
Many typical motor control functions have been predefined in
SIMOCODE pro and are available for use:
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters
• Wye-delta starters (also with direction reversal)1)
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing
switch); also with direction reversal1)
• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings
(also with direction reversal)1)
• Slide control1)
• Solenoid valve actuation1)
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)
• Actuation of a 3RW soft starter also with direction reversal1)
These control programs already include all the software
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the
required motor functions.
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not,
SIMOCODE pro opens the motor contactor and generates an
alarm indication.
Depending on the application, motor control can be switched
over or carried out simultaneously from several control stations,
e.g.:
• From the I&C system through PROFIBUS DP
• From a PC/PG through PROFIBUS DP
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel
• From a PC/PG on the system interface through
SIMOCODE pro
• From a local control station on the motor. In this case, the
buttons, switches and indicator lights are connected to the
inputs and outputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Regardless of whether a control command is sent to SIMOCODE
pro via PROFIBUS DP using the operator module or via the
buttons connected to the binary SIMOCODE pro inputs,
SIMOCODE pro can execute these control commands
simultaneously or in accordance with the enabled commands
defined during configuration.
These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted
to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of
freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers,
edge evaluation etc.).
In addition, special standard functions are stored in
SIMOCODE pro which can also be used to extend the protection
and control functions, e.g.:
• Power failure monitoring1) for automatic, time-staggered
restart of motors following a network failure e.g. with the help
of a separate voltage relay (voltage controller).
• Fault signaling modules for external faults with or without
manual or automatic acknowledgement for generating internal
messages or for tripping SIMOCODE pro in response to freely
definable events (e.g. overspeed monitor has been
activated). Designations/names can also be assigned to the
external faults which are stored in the device and which are
therefore also available to the I&C system.
• Emergency start function and reset of the thermal memory of
SIMOCODE pro after tripping, i.e. immediate restart is
possible (important, for example, for pumps used to
extinguish fires).
• Test function for the load feeder circuit when the main control
switch is open to test the control circuit while the main circuit
is de-energized.
Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data
SIMOCODE pro provides a variety of operating, service and
diagnostic data, such as:
Operating data
• The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise, counterclockwise, fast, slow) is derived from the current flow in the
main circuit, so checkbacks are not required through auxiliary
contacts from circuit-breakers and contactors
• Current in phase 1, 2, 3 and maximum current in % of the set
current
• Voltage in phases 1, 2, 3 in V3)
• Active power in W3)
• Apparent power in VA3)
• Power factor in %3)
• Phase unbalance in %
• Phase sequence3)
• Temperature in sensor circuits 1, 2, 3 and maximum
temperature in °C1)4)
• Current values of the analog signals1)2)
• Time until tripping in sec.
• Temperature rise for motor model in %
• Remaining cooling time of the motor in sec. etc.
Service data
• Motor operating hours (can be reset)
• Motor stop times (can be reset)
• Number of motor starts (can be reset)
• Number of remaining permissible motor starts
• Number of overload trips (can be reset)
• Internal comments, stored in the device for each feeder,
e.g. notes for maintenance events etc.
1) Using basic unit 2.
2) An additional analog module is required.
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.
4) An additional temperature module is required.
7/12
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Diagnostic data
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages (can
also be used for further processing in the device or I&C
system)
• Internal device fault logging with time stamp
• Value of the previous tripping current
• Checkback error (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit
following ON control command) etc.
Autonomous operation
An essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is independent
execution of all protection and control functions even if
communication with the I&C system breaks down. If the bus or
automation system fails, the full functionality of the feeder is
ensured or a pre-defined response can be initiated, e.g. the
feeder can be shut down in a controlled manner or certain
configured control mechanisms can be performed (e.g. the
direction of rotation can be reversed).
■ Integration
In addition to device function and hardware design, a great deal
of emphasis is placed on the case of communication-capable
controlgear on the user-friendliness of the configuration software
and the ability of the system to be integrated easily into various
different system configurations and process automation systems. For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suitable software tools for consistent, time-saving parameterization,
configuration and diagnostics:
• SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated startup and service
• OM SIMOCODE pro object manager for total integration into
SIMATIC S7
• PCS 7 function block library SIMOCODE pro for total
integration into PCS 7
SIMOCODE ES
The parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro can be run on
a PC/PG under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in
two functionally graded versions:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for direct connection to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface on the device
(point-to-point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connection to one or
several devices over PROFIBUS DP or point-to-point through
the system interface
With SIMOCODE ES, the SIMOCODE motor management system provides a user-friendly and clear-cut user interface with
which to configure, operate, monitor and test SIMOCODE pro in
the field or from a central location. By displaying all operating,
service and diagnostics data, SIMOCODE ES supplies important information on whether maintenance work is required or, in
the event of a fault, helps to prevent faults or to localize and rectify them once they have occurred.
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing
parameters online (even during operation). The flexible printing
function integrated into SIMOCODE ES allows comprehensive
documentation of all parameters or partial documentation of
selected or changed parameters.
• SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It
expands the user interface with a graphical editor and
supports extremely user-friendly parameterization with Drag &
Drop. Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be graphically
linked and parameters can be set. The configured functions
can be described in greater detail using comments and the
device parameterization can be documented graphically –
this speeds up start-up and simplifies the plant
documentation.
Note:
Installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic requires at least one
installed version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004+SP1 or
SIMOCODE ES Professional+SP1 (from April 2005) on the
PC/PG.
OM SIMOCODE pro object manager
(as part of SIMOCODE ES Professional)
The OM SIMOCODE pro object manager is a standard
component of SIMOCODE ES Professional. In contrast to a
conventional GSD file, it enables SIMOCODE ES to be
integrated into STEP 7 for convenient device parameterization.
By installing SIMOCODE ES Professional and
OM SIMOCODE pro on a PC/PG, which is used to configure the
hardware of the SIMATIC S7, SIMOCODE ES Professional can
be called directly from the hardware configuration. This allows
easy and consistent S7 configuration.
PCS 7 function block library for SIMOCODE pro
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library can be used for simple and
easy integration of SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 V6
process control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function
block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks
corresponding with the diagnostic and driver concept of
SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements (symbols and faceplate)
required for operator control and process monitoring. The
application is integrated by graphic interconnection using the
CFC Editor.
The technological and signal processing functions of the
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library are based on the
SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks, technological
blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODE pro. Users who
previously configured motor feeder circuits using conventional
technology by means of signal blocks and motor or valve blocks,
can now easily switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function
block library.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on
CD-ROM allows the user to run the required engineering
software on the engineering station (single license) including the
runtime software for executing the AS blocks in an automation
system (single license). If the AS blocks are to be used in
additional automation systems, the corresponding number of
runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data
carrier.
System manual for SIMOCODE pro
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor
management system and its functions in detail. It contains
information about configuration and commissioning as well as
servicing and maintenance. A typical example of a reversing
starter application is used to teach the user quickly and
practically how to use the system. In addition to help on how to
identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the
manual also contains special information for servicing and
maintenance.
Furthermore, the manual contains schematics, dimensional
drawings and technical specifications of the system
components as configuring aids.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/13
7
General
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
■ Technical specifications
General data applicable to the basic units, current measuring
modules, current/voltage measuring modules, expansion modules
and operator panel
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• Storage and transport
Installation altitude above sea level
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +50 °C
(no safe isolation)
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +40 °C
(no safe isolation)
°C
°C
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +80
m
m
ˆ 2000
ˆ 3000
m
ˆ 4000
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)
• All components
(except for current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring
modules for busbar connection, operator panel and door adapter)
• Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring module with
busbar connection
• Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
IP20
IP00
IP54
g/ms
Frequency
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1)
• Line-induced interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4
• Conducted interference, high frequency acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
• Line-induced interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5
• Electrostatic discharge, ESD acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1)
• Line-conducted and radiated interference emission
Safe isolation (acc. to IEC 60947-1)
15/11
Any
Mounting position
Hz
50/60 –5 %
kV
kV
V
kV
kV
kV
kV
V/m
Corresponds to degree of severity 3
2 (power ports)
1 (signal port)
10
2 (line to ground)
1 (line to line)
8 (air discharge)
6 (contact discharge)
10
EN 55011 / EN 55022 (CISPR 11 / CISPR 22)
(corresponds to degree of severity A)
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other acc. to
IEC 60947-1, they are designed with doubled creepage paths and
clearances
In this context, compliance with the instructions in the test report "Safe
Isolation" No. 2668 is required.
Basic units
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Mounting
Displays
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED
• Green "BUS" LED
7
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED
Test/Reset buttons
System interfaces
• Front
• Bottom
PROFIBUS DP interface
7/14
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Green: "Ready"
Red: "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Off: "No control supply voltage"
Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping
• Resets the device after tripping
• Function test
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug
Connection of an operator panel or expansion modules; the memory
module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system
interface for parameterizing
Connection of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
Connection of the PROFIBUS DP cable over terminals or
over a 9-pin sub D female connector
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Basic units
Control circuit
Rated control supply voltage Us (acc. to EN 61131-2)
110 ... 240 V AC/DC; 50/60 Hz
24 V DC
Operating range
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.8 ... 1.2 × Us
Power input
• Basic unit 1 (3UF7 000)
• Basic unit 2 (3UF7 010)
incl. two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2
7 VA
10 VA
5W
7W
Rated insulation voltage Ui
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Relay outputs
• Number
• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
• Rated uninterrupted current
• Rated short-circuit capacity
A
3 monostable relay outputs
Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs are jointly and 1 relay output is
separately connected to a common potential; they can be freely assigned to
the control functions (e.g. for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling
the operating status)
• Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
6
AC-15
6 A/24 V AC
6 A/120 V AC
3 A/230 V AC
DC-13
2 A/24 V DC
0.55 A/60 V DC
0.25 A/125 V DC
4 inputs supplied internally by the device electronics with 24 V DC and
connected to a common potential for acquiring process signals
(e.g. local control station, key switch, limit switch, ...),
freely assignable to control functions
Inputs (binary)
Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC)
• Summation cold resistance
• Operating value
• Return value
kW
kW
kW
ˆ 1.5
3.4 ... 3.8
1.5 ... 1.65
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
0.8 ... 1.2
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
Current measuring modules or
current/voltage measuring modules
Mounting
• Set current Ie = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A; 10 ... 100 A
(3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1, 3UF7 1.2)
• Set current Ie = 20 ... 200 A (3UF7 103, 3UF7 113)
• Set current Ie = 63 ... 630 A (3UF7 104, 3UF7 114)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail,
screwing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor
Screw fixing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor
System interfaces
for connection to a basic unit
3UF7 1.0
3UF7 1.1
3UF7 1.2
3UF7 1.3
3UF7 1.4
2.4 ... 25
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
63 ... 630
Set current Ie
A
0.3 ... 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(with pollution degree 3)
V
690
1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
6
8
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Type of current
Three-phase current
Short-circuit
Additional short-circuit protection is required in main circuit1)
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range 1 x minimum
set current Iu to 8 x max. set current Io)
Typical voltage measuring ranges
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. UL1 L2)
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1)
Accuracy
• Of voltage measurement
(phase voltage UL in the range 230 ... 400 V)
• Of power factor measurement
• Of apparent power measurement
Notes on voltage measurement
• Grounded network
• Rated control supply voltage Us
%
–3
V
V
110 ... 690
65 ... 400
%
–3 (typical)
%
%
–5 (typical)
–5 (typical)
suitable for three-phase supply with grounded neutral point
grounded mass or neutral conductor is required
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/15
7
Main circuit
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules
Connection for main circuit
Feed-through opening (diameter)
• Set current Ie = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A
• Set current Ie = 10 ... 100 A
• Set current Ie = 20 ... 200 A
Busbar connection1)
• Set current Ie
• Terminal screw
• Tightening torque
• Solid with cable lug
• Stranded with cable lug
• AWG cable
Conductor cross-sections for voltage measurement
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
mm
mm
mm
7.5
14.0
25.0
A
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
20 ... 200
M8 x 25
10 ... 14
16 ... 952)
25 ... 1202)
6 ... 3/0 kcmil
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
0.8 ... 1.2
1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
63 ... 630
M10 x 30
14 ... 24
50 ... 2403)
70 ... 2403)
1/0 ... 500 kcmil
Digital modules
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Mounting
Displays
• Green LED "READY"
Continuous light: "Ready"
Flashing:
"No connection to the PC"
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator
panel
System interfaces
Control circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
A
2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the variant)
Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning), all relay outputs are jointly connected to a
common potential, they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g.
for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)
• Fuse links, operational class gL/gG 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik<500 A)
6
Relay outputs
• Number
• Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay outputs
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
• Rated uninterrupted current
• Rated short-circuit capacity
AC-15
DC-13
7
6 A/120 V AC
0.55 A/60 V DC
3 A/230 V AC
0.25 A/125 V DC
4 externally supplied floating inputs, 24 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC/DC
depending on the variant; inputs jointly connected to common potential
for sensing process signals (e.g.: local control station, key switch, limit
switch ...), freely assignable to the control functions
Inputs (binary)
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
6 A/24 V AC
2 A/24 V DC
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
0.8 ... 1.2
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
Ground fault modules
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Mounting
Displays
• Green LED "READY"
Continuous light: "Ready"
Flashing:
"No connection to the PC"
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator
panel
System interfaces
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer with rated fault A
currents IN
• IGround fault ˆ 50 % IN
• IGround fault ˜ 100 % IN
0.3/0.5/1
No tripping
Tripping
Response delay
ms
300 ... 500, additionally delayable
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
0.8 ... 1.2
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
1) Screw connection is possible using a suitable 3RT19 ... box terminal.
2) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46235, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2 to ensure phase
spacing.
7/16
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
3) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46234 for conductor crosssections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
spacing.
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Temperature modules
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Mounting
Displays
• Green LED "READY"
Continuous light: "Ready"
Flashing:
"No connection to the PC"
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator
panel
System interfaces
Sensor circuits
Typical sensor circuits
• PT100
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
Wire-break/short-circuit detection
• For sensor type
• Open-circuit
• Short-circuit
• Measuring range
mA
mA
1 (typical)
0.2 (typical)
°C
PT100/PT1000
•
•
-50 ... +500
KTY83-110
•
•
-50 ... +175
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature (T20)
K
< –2
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range)
%
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
0.8 ... 1.2
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
KTY84
•
•
-40 ... +300
NTC
-•
+80 ... +160
Analog modules
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Mounting
Displays
• Green LED "READY"
Continuous light: "Ready"
Flashing:
"No connection to the PC"
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator
panel
System interfaces
Control circuits
Outputs
• Channels
• Parameterizable output range
• Shielding
• Max. voltage at output
• Accuracy
• Max. output load
• Conversion time
• Resolution
• Short-circuit resistant
mA
mA
%
W
ms
bit
mA
%
W
ms
bit
2
0/4 ... 20
up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
40
1
50
130
12
with measuring range 4 ... 20 mA
1
0/4 ... 20
up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
30 V DC
1
500
10
12
yes
Connection type
2-wire connection
Voltage isolation of inputs/outputs to the device electronics
no
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• AWG cable (solid)
• AWG cable (finely stranded)
Nm
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
7
Inputs
• Channels
• Parameterizable measuring ranges
• Shielding
• Max. input current (destruction limit)
• Accuracy
• Input resistance
• Conversion time
• Resolution
• Open-circuit detection
0.8 ... 1.2
1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/17
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Operator panels
Mounted in a control cabinet door or in a front panel,
IP54 with system interface cover
Mounting
Displays
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED
• Green "BUS" LED
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED
• Green or yellow LEDs
Keys
• Test/Reset
• Control keys
System interfaces
• Front
7
• Rear
7/18
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Green:
"Ready"
Green flashing: "No connection to the basic unit"
Red:
"Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Off:
"No control supply voltage"
Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
Flashing:
"Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping
for assigning to any status signals, as required
• Resets the device after tripping
• Function test
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug
for controlling the motor feeder, user-assignable
for plugging in a memory module, an addressing plug or
a PC cable for parameterization
Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V for 3UF7
Current measuring
modules or current/
voltage measuring
modules
Contactors
CLASS 5 and Class 10
CLASS 15
CLASS 20
CLASS 25
Rated operational current Ie/AC-3 in A at ... V
Types
400
500
690
400
500
690
400
500
690
400
500
690
3RT10 15
3RT10 16
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3RT10 15
3RT10 16
3RT10 17
7.0
9.0
12.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
7.0
9.0
11.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
7.0
9.0
10.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
7.0
9.0
9.5
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
3RT10 23
3RT10 24
3RT10 25
3RT10 26
9.0
12.0
17.0
25.0
6.5
12.0
17.0
18.0
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
9.0
12.0
17.0
18.0
6.5
12.0
17.0
18.0
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
9.0
12.0
16.0
16.0
6.5
12.0
16.0
16.0
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
-12.0
15.0
15.0
-12.0
15.0
15.0
-9.0
13.0
13.0
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
20.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
20.0
24.0
22.3
25.0
22.3
25.0
20.0
24.0
20.3
25.0
20.3
25.0
20.3
24.0
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
32.0
40.0
50.0
32.0
40.0
50.0
20.0
24.0
24.0
25.5
33.0
38.5
25.5
33.0
38.5
20.0
24.0
24.0
22.3
29.4
32.7
22.3
29.4
32.7
20.0
24.0
24.0
20.3
28.0
29.4
20.3
28.0
29.4
20.0
24.0
24.0
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 46
65.0
80.0
95.0
65.0
80.0
95.0
47.0
58.0
58.0
56.0
61.0
69.0
56.0
61.0
69.0
47.0
58.0
58.0
49.0
53.0
59.0
49.0
53.0
59.0
47.0
53.0
58.0
45.0
47.0
53.0
45.0
47.0
53.0
45.0
47.0
53.0
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
100.0
--
100.0
--
100.0
--
93.2
100.0
93.2
100.0
93.2
100.0
81.7
100.0
81.7
100.0
81.7
100.0
74.8
97.5
74.8
97.5
74.8
97.5
115
150
185
115
150
185
115
150
170
93.2
122
150
93.2
122
150
93.2
122
150
81.7
107
131
81.7
107
131
81.7
107
131
74.8
98
120
74.8
98
120
74.8
98
120
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 66
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
280
182
215
243
182
215
243
182
215
243
160
188
213
160
188
213
160
188
213
146
172
195
146
172
195
146
172
195
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
400
500
400
500
400
450
324
405
324
405
324
405
284
355
284
355
284
355
260
325
260
325
260
325
3RT12 64
3RT12 65
3RT12 66
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
225
265
300
194
228
258
194
228
258
194
228
258
3RT12 75
3RT12 76
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
400
500
344
430
344
430
344
430
3TF681)
1)
630
630
630
630
630
630
502
630
502
630
502
630
440
572
440
572
440
572
408
531
408
531
408
531
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0
Set current 10 ... 100 A
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0
Set current 20 ... 200 A
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
Set current 63 ... 630 A
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0
3TF69
7
1) Contactor cannot be mounted.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/19
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
Current measuring
modules or current/
voltage measuring
modules
Contactors
CLASS 30
CLASS 35
Fuse links1)
CLASS 40
LV HRC
DIAZED
type 3NA
type 5SB
NEOZED type 5SE
Operational class gL(gG)
Types of coordination2)
1
2
400 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
690 V
690 V
3RT10 15
3RT10 16
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
35
35
20
20
3RT10 15
3RT10 16
3RT10 17
7.0
9.0
9.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
7.0
9.0
9.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
7.0
8.5
8.5
5.0
6.5
8.5
4.0
5.2
6.3
35
35
35
20
20
20
3RT10 23
3RT10 24
3RT10 25
3RT10 26
-12.0
14.0
14.0
-12.0
14.0
14.0
-9.0
13.0
13.0
-12.0
13.0
13.0
-12.0
13.0
13.0
-9.0
13.0
13.0
-12.0
12.0
12.0
-12.0
12.0
12.0
-9.0
12.0
12.0
63
63
63
100
25
25
25
35
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
19.1
25.0
19.1
25.0
19.1
24.0
17.6
25.0
17.6
25.0
17.6
24.0
16.1
23.5
16.1
23.5
16.1
23.5
125
125
63
63
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
19.1
26.5
26.5
19.1
26.5
26.5
19.1
24.0
24.0
17.6
25.0
25.0
17.6
25.0
25.0
17.6
24.0
24.0
16.1
23.5
23.5
16.1
23.5
23.5
16.1
23.5
23.5
125
125
160
63
63
80
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 46
41.7
45.0
50.0
41.7
45.0
50.0
41.7
45.0
50.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
34.5
40.0
44.0
34.5
40.0
44.0
34.5
40.0
44.0
200
200
200
125
160
160
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
69.0
90.0
69.0
90.0
69.0
90.0
63.0
82.0
63.0
82.0
63.0
82.0
57.0
74.0
57.0
74.0
57.0
74.0
355
355
315
315
69.0
90
111
69.0
90
111
69.0
90
111
64.0
82
102
64.0
82
102
64.0
82
102
-74
93
-74
93
-74
93
355
355
355
315
315
315
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 66
135
159
180
135
159
180
135
159
180
126
146
165
126
146
165
126
146
165
-133
150
-133
150
-133
150
500
500
500
400
400
400
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
240
300
240
300
240
300
220
275
220
275
220
275
200
250
200
250
200
250
630
630
400
500
3RT12 64
3RT12 65
3RT12 66
173
204
231
173
204
231
173
204
231
152
180
204
152
180
204
152
180
204
131
156
177
131
156
177
131
156
177
500
500
500
500
500
500
3RT12 75
3RT12 76
316
385
316
385
316
385
-340
-340
-340
-316
-316
-316
800
800
800
800
3TF683)
3TF693)
376
500
376
500
376
500
344
469
344
469
344
469
317
438
317
438
317
438
800
800
5004)
6304)
Rated operational current Ie/AC-3 in A at ... V
Types
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0
Set current 10 ... 100 A
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0
Set current 20 ... 200 A
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
Set current 63 ... 630 A
7
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0
1) Note the operational voltage.
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1.
Type of coordination "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to
be suitable for further operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Contactor cannot be mounted.
4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has a sufficient
safety clearance from the rated fuse current.
7/20
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
■ Dimension drawings
Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V, 3UF7 010
5
5
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 7 9
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 7 8
8 0
8 0
1 0 6
1 0 6
1 2
1 2
Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C, 3UF7 000
5
4 5
3 6
6 5
1 1 5
4
3UF7 102 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 0 a
8 4
9 4
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 1
3UF7 100, 3UF7 101 current measuring module (straight-through
transformer)
5
4 5
4
8 6
5
6 7
1 4
6 6 3 8
6 !
5 5
4 0
5
4 5
6
6 !
6
6 5
7 ,5
3UF7 103 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)
1 2 0
7 9
9 5
7
9 5
5
1 4 0
7 8
7
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 2
2 5
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/21
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
3UF7 103 current measuring module (busbar connection)
1 2 0
9 5
1 7
7 9
9 5
9
1 1 9
3 7
7
5
4 7
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 3
8 4
1 4 0
3UF7 104 current measuring module (busbar connection)
1 4 5
5 0
2 5
8 5
1 2 2
1 4 7
5 7
1 1
7
1 2 5
9
6 0 ,5
6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 4
6
6 0 ,5
1 4 8
7/22
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
3UF7 112 current/voltage measuring module
(straight-through transformer)
8 5
9 4
3UF7 110, 3UF7 111 current/voltage measuring module
(straight-through transformer)
4 5
2 1
5
5 5
3 1
6 6
5
2 0
6 0
9 2
6 !
6 2 3
1 1
6 6
1 2
7
6 !
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 3
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 2
6
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (straight-through transformer)
1 2 0
7 9
9 5
9 5
5
7 3
1 4 0
3 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 1
2 5
7
7 8
7
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/23
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
1 2 0
9 5
1 7
7 9
7 9
9 5
9
1 1 9
3 7
7
5
4 7
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 8
1 4 0
3UF7 114 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
145
48
25
122
147
88
11
9
7
32
125
67
NSA0_00404
6
149
3UF7 200 operator panel
9 6
7/24
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
2 9
3 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 5
8
2 9
7
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
3UF7 920 door adapter
3UF7 3 digital modules
3UF7 4 analog module
3UF7 5 ground fault module
3UF7 7 temperature module
3
1 7
6 8
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 7
9 2
3 7
4 6
1 0
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 6
3 9
2 2 ,5
5
1 1 5
4
■ Schematics
Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
3/N/PE AC 50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1
2L1
1L1
L2
L3
N
PE
2N
1N
PE
/.2
18 19 20
-X19
-F11
6 4 2
>
>
-T10
Current detection
5 3 1
SPE
/PE
L1 L2 L3
A B
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro C/V
Basic unit
BU
T1 T2 T3
>
C 1A
-A10 X9
PTC
IN1
IN2
9
>
C 1,6A
A1 A2
230 V AC
1
6
Device
BUS
Gen. fault
Test/Reset
IN3
10
1
5
ON<
DEVICE
24V
IN4
4
-A12
0UT1
0UT2
0UT3
3
2
8
ON>
BUS
OFF
TEST
RESET
GEN.FAULT
Operator panel
7
7
T1 T2
-F12
1
-Q1
>
3 4
1 2
SYS
3 2 1
SYS
-X1
PROFIBUS
AB AB
<2>
<1>
1 3 5
1 3 5
-K1
-K2
/.4 2 4 6 /.4 2 4 6
-X1
6 5 4
-X19
A1
-K1
<1> A2
11
12
10
9
-K2
<2>
A1
A2
6
8
7
NSA0_00420
-X2
1 2 3
-S11
<1>
PE /.2
-M1
U V W
PE
M
3 AC
13
-S12
14
<4>
21
-S13
22
<3>
13
14
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
Main contactor Clockwise
Main contactor Counterclockwise
Local OFF
Local Clockwise
Local Counterclockwise
<5>
Circuit diagrams for additional control functions can be referred to in the SIMOCODE pro system manual.
■ More information
System manual
Internet
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended
that the 3UF7 970-0AA0.-0 system manual is consulted.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/simocode
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/25
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
■ Overview
Expansion module
3
1
NSA0_00142a
1
2
$ PC/system interface
% Four relay outputs, floating
& Eight inputs (24 V, 115 V, 230 V)
Front view of expansion module
Operator panel
4
SIEMENS
1
Ready
Gen. Fault
SIMOCODE-DP basic unit, expansion module and operator module
SIMOCODE-DP is the predecessor of the SIMOCODE pro motor
management system and offers the solution for a wide range of
different tasks in a single unit:
• Multifunctional, electronic motor protection and plant
monitoring
• Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics
• Integrated control programs (instead of extensive hardware
wiring)
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard
for fieldbus systems
NSA0_00143a
2
$
%
&
(
)
1
2
Eight LEDs
Labeling strips
Test/reset button for device test or manual reset
Three control keys
PC/system interface, with cover
Front view of operator panel
Safe isolation
The SIMOCODE-DP system hardware comprises:
• Basic unit
• Expansion module (optional)
• Operator panel (optional)
All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP (from product version 12,
start of delivery 01/2000) are safely isolated from each other. The
instructions of test report No. 1610a must be complied with.
Basic unit
Connection and mounting
1
2
SIEMENS
Ready
Bus
Gen. Fault
3
NSA0_00141b
7
■ Design
5
3
6
7
4
8
5
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
Connection of thermistor of summation transformer
Connection of control supply voltage
Three LEDs
Test/reset button for device test or manual reset
Four relay outputs, floating
Four inputs (24 V)
PC/system interface
PROFIBUS DP interface
Front view of the basic unit
7/26
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Devices with current adjustment ranges from 1.25 to 100 A
(overall width 70 mm) are designed for stand-alone installation
due to the straight-through current transformer, i.e. they are
either snapped onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail or screwed
onto a mounting plate using push-in lugs that are available as
accessories.
The main conductors are simply passed through the straightthrough current transformer integrated into the enclosure, using
multiple loops, loads with rated motor currents of less than
1.25 A can also be protected.
With current adjustment ranges greater than 100 A to 820 A
(width: 120 mm, 145 mm and 230 mm), the devices can be
directly fitted to the contactor using the connecting rails of the
current transformer.
A screw fastening for these devices is integrated in the
enclosure.
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
■ Function
Protective and monitoring functions
Ground-fault monitoring
For the protection of loads against impermissible high
temperature rises
Two qualitatively different ground-fault monitoring functions are
offered:
• "Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of calculation
The internal ground-fault monitoring is only suitable for motors
with 3-wire connection and for networks that are grounded
directly or with a low impedance. In this case, the ground-fault
current is calculated by vector addition of the phase currents
of the SIMOCODE-DP current transformer. An additional
summation current transformer is not necessary. In fault-free
systems, the vectorial summation current of the three phases
is zero; if this is not the case, a ground-fault is signaled.
Ground-fault currents that are more than 30 % of the operating
current Ie are detected.
• "Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of measurement
The external ground-fault detection is normally used in supply
systems that have a high impedance ground. An additional
summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A) is required for
this method that is also suitable for extremely low ground-fault
currents. Detected fault current, depending on the summation
current transformer: 0.3/0.5/1 A.
EEx e type of protection
The SIMOCODE-DP system is in compliance with the regulations
for overload protection of explosion-protected motors of the
EEx e "Increased safety" type of protection according to
• EN 50019
• EN 60079-7, IEC 60079-7
• EN 60079-14 (potentially explosive areas)
• EN 50281 (areas with combustible dust)
• ATEX/PTB test regulations
In the case of SIMOCODE-DP units with 24 V DC control infeed,
isolation by battery or safety transformer according to
EN 61558-2-6 must be assured.
EC type test certificate: PTB01 ATEX 3219
Test report: PTB EX 01-30013
Rotor locking protection
When the motor current rises above a rotor locking threshold that
can be set, SIMOCODE-DP does not trip according to the
overload characteristic, but switches off immediately instead.
The prevention of unnecessary thermal loads prevents
premature aging of the motor. The rotor locking protection is not
active for start-up monitoring until the class time has elapsed,
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds.
Current limit monitoring I>, I<
Current limit monitoring is not used for motor protection, but for
process monitoring.
It is used to detect developing irregularities in the plant early,
e.g. motor bearings becoming tight (consequence: upper limit
responds) or the belt coupling to the drive machine tears
(consequence: lower limit responds).
Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics
SIMOCODE-DP provides a variety of measuring, operating and
diagnostics data concerning the load feeder:
• Up-to-date information during operation, e.g.:
- The currently flowing phase current in %
- The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise,
counterclockwise, fast, slow) derived from the current flow
- Manual/automatic mode
- Test mode
- Cooling time activated after an overload tripping operation
• Detection of incipient faults, e.g.:
- Overload warning
- Current limit overshoot
- Phase unbalance
- Thermistor warning
• Rapid diagnostics in the event of an alarm, e.g.:
- Overload
- Thermistor motor protection
- Rotor locking
- Current limit overshoot
- Checkback error (e.g. no current following On command)
• Preventive maintenance by means of statistical data, e.g.:
- Number of starts
- Number of overload trips
- Tripping currents
- Operating hours
Integrated standard programs for motor control
In SIMOCODE-DP, a number of different opportunities for
controlling the motor has been predefined and can be called up
in the form of control functions:
• Overload relay
• Direct-on-line starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye-delta starter
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/27
7
Types of overload protection:
• Current-sensitive, electronic overload protection with
adjustable tripping characteristics (class times)
SIMOCODE-DP protects three-phase or AC motors from
overloading according to the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1.
The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time
during which SIMOCODE-DP must trip at 7.2 times the
operational current from cold. The trip class can be set in six
stages from Class 5 to Class 30. The break time can therefore
be extremely finely adjusted to the load torque of the motor –
to optimize utilization of the motor (see also the section
Characteristic Curves).
• Phase failure/unbalance monitoring
A signal is output for a phase unbalance greater than 40 %.
The tripping times of the overload characteristic are reduced,
because the heat generated in the motor rises under
unbalanced conditions (additional eddy-current losses).
• Thermistor motor protection
Temperature-dependent motor protection is based on direct
temperature measurements in the motor. These protective
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or
braking operation, but also in the case of a blocked air supply
or speeds lower than the rated speed. For this reason, a wide
range of different temperature sensors are available that are
installed in the stator winding or in the motor enclosure.
SIMOCODE-DP can evaluate the following sensor types:
- Binary PTC sensors whose resistance rises sharply when the
temperature limit is reached
- Analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY83/84, which
have an almost linear characteristic curve and can therefore
be set to any warning or switch-off temperatures
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
•
•
•
•
•
Two speeds, Dahlander winding
Two speeds, separate winding
Valve
Actuator
Soft starter (3RW)
These control programs already include all the software
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the
required motor functions.
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not,
SIMOCODE-DP opens the motor contactor and generates an
alarm indication.
The motor can be controlled by any equipment depending on
the application:
• From the process control system or the PC through
PROFIBUS DP
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel
• From a local control point on the motor, whereby the
pushbuttons/switches are wired to the SIMOCODE-DP inputs
Furthermore, special standard function blocks are stored in
SIMOCODE-DP:
• Automatic, time-discrete reactivation of motors following
mains failure
The prerequisites are as follows:
- Failure of the three-phase supply must take place through a
separate voltage relay
- The supply voltage of SIMOCODE-DP must not be
interrupted
• Different error signaling modules with and without
acknowledgement
These allow SIMOCODE-DP to trip as a result of external
events (e.g. overspeed monitor has tripped)
• The emergency start function
This resets the thermal memory of SIMOCODE-DP
immediately after overload tripping, i.e. immediate restarting
is possible (important, for example, for a fire-extinguisher
pump)
• The test function for the load feeder
This can be activated by switching off the main switch Q1 (see
the section Schematics) and allows the control circuit to be
checked with the motor branch at zero current.
The standard control functions can also be adapted to each
customized variant of a motor feeder by means of freelyparameterizable elements, such as timers, counters, logic
operations (AND, OR, NOR, etc.).
■ Integration
The SIMOCODE-DP modular system offers a wide range of
software packages for system-wide and time-saving
configuration and diagnostics:
• PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service
• Object manager OM-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in
SIMATIC S7
• Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in PCS7
7
PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service
Standard PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and
service. It offers a user-friendly and convenient user-interface
for:
• Parameterization
• Display and diagnostics
• Test functions
• Motor control
Win-SIMOCODE-DP is available in two versions:
• Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Smart
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP through the system
interface on the device
• Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP over PROFIBUS or
directly through the system interface on the device
OM-SIMOCODE object manager for "totally integrated" in
SIMATIC S7
SIMOCODE-DP can be integrated into SIMATIC S7 in two
different ways:
• Conventionally using GSD files
i.e. integration in SIMATIC S7 is identical to integration in any
other DP standard master system
7/28
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
• Using the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager
i.e. SIMOCODE-DP becomes an integral component of
STEP 7; the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager should, in
this case, always be combined with the start-up and service
software Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional
Both software packages must be installed on the PG/PC on
which the hardware configuration of SIMATIC S7 is performed.
This ensures that Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional can be
called up directly from HW-Config.
Parameter sets created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional
are loaded into the STEP 7 data storage by means of OM and
automatically transferred to SIMOCODE-DP during start-up.
Functions specific to SIMATIC S7, such as diagnostic and
hardware interrupts are supported, which means easier S7-wide
configuration as well as optimal performance in the transfer of
diagnostic data.
Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in
PCS7
With PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP it is easy and convenient to
integrate SIMOCODE-DP into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system. PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP contains the
diagnostic and driver blocks corresponding with the diagnostic
and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements
(symbols and faceplate) required for operator control and
process monitoring. The application is integrated by graphic
interconnection using the CFC Editor. The technological and
signal processing functions of the PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP are
based on the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks,
technological blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODEDP. Users who previously configured motor feeder circuits using
conventional technology by means of signal blocks and motor or
valve blocks, can now easily switch to PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP.
The PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP supplied on CD-ROM allows the
user to run the required engineering software on one
engineering station (single license) including the runtime
software for executing the AS blocks in an automation system
(single license).
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
■ Technical specifications
Shared data of basic units/expansion units/
expansion modules/operator panels
Permissible ambient temperature
°C
-25 ... +60
Permissible storage temperature
°C
-40 ... +80
Installation altitude above sea level
m
ˆ 2000
IP20 max. set current Ie ˆ 100 A;
IP00 max. set current Ie > 100 A
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
g/ms
Mounting
• Max. set current Ie ˆ 100 A
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with push-in lugs
Screw fixing directly onto contactor or screw fixing
• Max. set current Ie > 100 A
EMC interference immunity
• Conducted interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4
• Conducted interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3
10/5
Any
Mounting position
kV
kV
kV
V/m
2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
8 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
10 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
EMC interference emission
Limit class B acc. to EN 55011 (VDE 0875 Part 11)
Safe isolation
(product version 12 upwards, start of delivery 01/2000)
All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP are safely isolated from each other,
i.e. they are designed with double leakage paths and clearances
Power circuit from the control/electronic circuits:
Safe isolation up to 690 V or 1000 V between control and electronic circuits
One below the other: Safe isolation up to 300 V
Observe notes of test report "Safe Isolation" No. 1610a.
Basic units
Displays
• Green "Ready" LED
Continuous light: "Ready"
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Continuous light: "Bus operation"
Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
• Green "BUS" LED
• Red "General Fault" LED
Test/Reset buttons
By pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its
functions can be tested
System interfaces
RS 232 for connecting the expansion module, operator panel or PC
PROFIBUS DP interface
RS 485 for connecting the PROFIBUS DP line using terminals (conductor crosssections as for auxiliary contacts) or 9-pole SUB D socket
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(with pollution degree 3)
• For uninsulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021)
• For insulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021)
• For uninsulated and insulated conductors
(3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051)
V
V
V
690
1000
1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
• 3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021
• 3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051
kV
kV
6
8
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
7
Main circuits
Type of current
Three-phase current
Short-circuit protection
See table Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders, page 7/31
Diameters of feed-through openings
(max. Ie = 100 A)
• Devices with max. set current Ie ˆ 25 A
• Devices with max. set current Ie ˆ 100 A
• Devices with max. set current Ie > 100 A
mm
mm
10
15
Design with connecting bars
• Current range
• Tightening torque
A
Nm
50 ... 205
M 8: 10 ... 14
125 ... 500
M 10: 14 ... 24
• Finely stranded with cable lug
• Stranded with cable lug
mm2
mm2
35 ... 95
50 ... 120
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
Busbar connections
200 ... 820
M 10: 14 ... 24
M 12: 20 ... 35
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/29
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
Auxiliary circuits/control circuits
Rated control supply voltage Us
AC 50/60 Hz; 115 V and 230 V
24 V DC
Operating range
AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
24 V DC; 0.85 ... 1.2 ™ Us
Power input
AC 50/60 Hz; 5 VA
24 V DC; 5 W
Rated insulation voltage Ui
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Outputs
• Number
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs
4 monostable/bistable outputs depending on the variant
NC contact response can be parameterized by means of internal signal
conditioning; 3 outputs jointly and 1 separately connected to common potential; they
can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for activating mains, wye and
delta contactors and signaling the operating status)
Fuse links, gL/gA operational class 6 A, quick 10 A; circuit-breaker 1.6 A,
C characteristic
• Specified short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (outputs)
Rated uninterrupted current
A
5
Rated operational current
(switching capacity)
AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V
DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V
Inputs
4 inputs, supplied by the device electronics (24 V DC), jointly connected to a
common potential, for injecting process signals such as local control points, keyoperated switches or limit switches
Thermistor motor protection
(binary PTC thermistor)
• Summation cold resistance
• Operating value
• Return value
kW
kW
kW
1.5
2.7 ... 3.1
1.5 ... 1.65
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid and stranded
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
Nm
mm2
mm2
0.8 ... 1.2
1 ™ (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 1.5)
Expansion modules
RS 232 as connection to the basic unit and for connecting the operator panel or PC
System interfaces
Rated insulation voltage Ui
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Outputs
• Number
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs
4 bistable outputs
Each with 1 floating NO contact, NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning, 3 outputs are jointly and 1 is separately connected to a
common potential; they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for
activating mains, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)
Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A;
circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic
7
• Specified short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (outputs)
Rated uninterrupted current
A
5
Rated operational current
(switching capacity)
AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V
DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V
Inputs
8 externally supplied with 24 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC depending on the variant,
jointly connected to a common potential, for injecting process signals such as local
control points, key-operated switches or limit switches
Conductor cross-sections
• Tightening torque
• Solid and stranded
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
Nm
mm2
mm2
0.8 ... 1.2
1 ™ (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 1.5)
Operator panels
Displays
• Green "Ready" LED
• Red "General Fault" LED
• 3 green and 3 yellow LEDs
Keys
• Test/Reset
• Control keys
System interfaces
7/30
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Continuous light: "Ready"
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
Feeder-specific displays, freely-assignable, e.g. manual/automatic mode, tripping of
thermistor protection, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation etc.
by pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its
functions can be tested
for controlling the motor feeder, freely programmable
RS 232 as connection to the basic unit, to the expansion module and for connection
to PC
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 1
Basic
units
Contactors Class 5 and 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 25
Class 30
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at ... V
400
500
690
400
500
690
400
500
690
400
500
690
400
500
690
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A
3UF5 00
3RT1 015
6.3
5.0
4.0
6.3
5.0
4.0
6.3
5.0
4.0
6.3
5.0
4.0
6.3
5.0
4.0
3RT1 016
6.3
6.3
5.2
6.3
6.3
5.2
6.3
6.3
5.2
6.3
6.3
5.2
6.3
6.3
5.2
3RT1 017
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A
3UF5 01
3RT1 015
7.0
3RT1 016
9.0
6.5
7.0
7.0
9.0
6.5
7.0
9.0
6.5
7.0
9.0
6.5
9.0
6.5
3RT1 017
12.0
9.0
6.3
11.0
9.0
6.3
10.0
9.0
6.3
9.5
9.0
6.3
9.0
9.0
6.3
3RT1 024
12.0
12.0
9.0
12.0
12.0
9.0
12.0
12.0
9.0
12.0
12.0
9.0
12.0
12.0
9.0
3RT1 025
17.0
17.0
13.0
17.0
17.0
13.0
16.0
16.0
13.0
15.0
15.0
13.0
14.0
14.0
13.0
3RT1 026
25.0
18.0
13.0
18.0
18.0
13.0
16.0
16.0
13.0
15.0
15.0
13.0
14.0
14.0
13.0
3RT1 034
25.0
25.0
20.0
25.0
25.0
20.0
22.3
22.3
20.0
20.3
20.3
20.3
19.1
19.1
19.1
3RT1 035
25.0
25.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
24.0
Setting range 25 ... 100 A
3UF5 02
3RT1 034
32.0
32.0
20.0
25.5
25.5
20.0
22.3
22.3
20.0
20.3
20.3
20.0
19.1
19.1
19.1
3RT1 035
40.0
40.0
24.0
33.0
33.0
24.0
29.4
29.4
24.0
28.0
28.0
24.0
26.5
26.5
24.0
3RT1 036
50.0
50.0
24.0
38.5
38.5
24.0
32.7
32.7
24.0
29.4
29.4
24.0
26.5
26.5
24.0
3RT1 044
65.0
65.0
47.0
56.0
56.0
47.0
49.0
49.0
47.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
41.7
41.7
41.7
3RT1 045
80
80
58
61
61
58
53
53
53
47
47
47
45
45
45
3RT1 046
95
95
58
69
69
58
59
59
58
53
53
53
50
50
50
Setting range 50 ... 205 A
3UF5 03
3RT1 054
115
115
115
93
93
93
82
82
82
75
75
75
69
69
69
3RT1 055
150
150
150
122
122
122
107
107
107
98
98
98
90
90
90
3RT1 056
185
185
170
150
150
150
131
131
131
120
120
120
111
111
111
3UF5 04
3RT1 064
225
225
225
182
182
182
160
160
160
146
146
146
135
135
135
3RT1 065
265
265
265
215
215
215
188
188
188
172
172
172
159
159
159
3RT1 066
300
300
280
243
243
243
213
213
213
195
195
195
180
180
180
3RT1 075
400
400
400
324
324
324
284
284
284
260
260
260
240
240
240
3RT1 076
500
500
450
405
405
405
355
355
355
325
325
325
300
300
300
3RT1 264
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
194
194
194
173
173
173
3RT1 265
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
228
228
228
204
204
204
3RT1 266
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
258
258
258
231
231
231
3RT1 275
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
344
344
344
308
308
308
3RT1 276
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
430
430
430
385
385
385
Setting range 200 ... 820 A
3UF5 05
3TF6 81)
630
630
630
502
502
502
440
440
440
408
408
408
376
376
376
3TF6 91)
820
820
820
662
662
662
572
572
572
531
531
531
500
500
500
1) Contactors mountable.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/31
7
Setting range 125 ... 500 A
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 2
Basic units
Contactors
Fuse links1)
690 V
LV HRC
DIAZED
NEOZED
Operational class gL
(gG)
Type 3NA
Type 5SB
Type 5SE
Type 3ND
aM
415 V
600 V
British Standards
fuses BS88
UL-listed fuses RK5/L
Type of coordination2)
1
2
500
35
35
35
20
20
20
20
20
20
25
25
25
35
35
35
63
63
100
125
125
20
20
20
25
25
35
63
63
20
20
20
50
50
20
20
20
25
25
25
63
63
60
60
60
70
70
100
100
100
125
125
160
250
250
250
63
63
80
125
160
160
50
50
50
63
80
100
63
80
80
125
160
160
125
150
200
250
250
350
355
355
355
315
315
315
160
200
200
250
315
315
450
500
500
500
500
500
630
630
500
500
500
800
800
400
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
800
800
250
315
315
400
500
400
400
400
630
630
400
400
400
450
500
450
450
450
800
800
700
800
800
1000
1200
800
800
800
1200
1200
1000
1250
5004)
6304)
630
630
500
630
1200
2000 CLASS L
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A
3UF5 00
3RT1 015
3RT1 016
3RT1 017
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A
3UF5 01
3RT1 015
3RT1 016
3RT1 017
3RT1 024
3RT1 025
3RT1 026
3RT1 034
3RT1 035
Setting range 25 ... 100 A
3UF5 02
3RT1 034
3RT1 035
3RT1 036
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
Setting range 50 ... 205 A
3UF5 03
3RT1 054
3RT1 055
3RT1 056
Setting range 125 ... 500 A
7
3UF5 04
3RT1 064
3RT1 065
3RT1 066
3RT1 075
3RT1 076
3RT1 264
3RT1 265
3RT1 266
3RT1 275
3RT1 276
Setting range 200 ... 820 A
3UF5 05
3TF6 83)
3TF6 93)
1) Note the operational voltage.
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to
be suitable for further operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Contactors mountable.
4) Ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current is sufficiently different
from the rated fuse current.
7/32
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
■ Characteristic curves
Tripping characteristics for three-pole loads
120
100
NSA00146
■ Dimensional drawings
3UF5 001, 3UF5 011 and 3UF5 021 basic units
10
4,5
7,2
12,3
Tripping time
2
1
50
15
10
10
CLASS
5
5
14
CLASS 30
25
20
5
85
10
100
100
20
s
min
50
50
70
a
f
e
2
0,6
127,5
5
b
20
1
5
2
10xI e
Tripping current (average)
NSA00148
c
d
The current-time curves for 3-pole symmetrical load show the
relationship between the release time from cold and multiples of
the operational current.
If the device is pre-loaded with 100 % of the current setting, the
tripping times are reduced.
Tripping characteristics for double-pole loads
120
100
3UF50 01
3UF50 11
3UF50 21
a
b
c
d
e
f
10
10
15
34
34
29
29
29
24
46
46
47
48
48
4
4
3UF5 031, 3UF5 041 and 3UF5 051 basic units
g
NSA00147
f
h
p
q
20
10
o
d
b
2
1
50
i
CLASS 30
25
20
5
20
15
10
CLASS
5
5
10
k
a
2
l
n
c
1
5
2
10x I e
Tripping current (average)
In the case of 2-pole loading (failure of one phase) or current
unbalance > 40 % of the current setting, the tripping times are
reduced, because the heat generated due to the unbalanced
loading of the motor rises.
7
0,6
j
m
e
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 4 9 a
s
Tripping time
min
50
a
b
c
d
3 U F 5 0 3 1
3 U F 5 0 4 1
3 U F 5 0 5 1
1 2 0
1 4 5
2 3 0
8 5
8 5
8 5
1 5 5
1 7 5
1 9 0
1 1 0
1 0 5
1 2 0
i
j
k
3 U F 5 0 3 1
3 U F 5 0 4 1
3 U F 5 0 5 1
1 2 5
1 3 0
1 3 5
4 1
2 0
5 5
4 0
4 6
e
l
3 0
f
4 0
5 0
7 0
Ø
Ø
Ø
7
m
9
1 1
1 3 1
1 5 1
1 6 6
7 ,2
7 ,2
7 ,2
g
h
4 2
3 7
7 0
–
5 2
o
1 4 5
1 6 0
1 7 5
–
–
n
1 3
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
4 8
p
q
8
6
4
M
M
M
8
1 0
1 2
7/33
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
3UF5 1 expansion module
3UF5 2 operator panel
NSA00151
12,3
60
10
4,5
7,2
85
100
100
32
5
50
70
NSA00150
14
98
127,5
■ Schematics
Reversing starter
LOCAL CONTROL
3/N/PE 50/60 Hz 400/230 V AC
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
-X1
PROFIBUS-DP
1L1
1N
PE
2L1
2N
-S8
2N
/1.3
3
2
1
6
4
2
-X19
11
19 20
12 18
-S6
LEFT
21
OFF
22
14
13 14
RIGHT
14
1
8
13
-S7
2
3
1
-F11
-Q1
13
2N
/1.3
/1.8
/1.6
>
2
5
3
1
11
-Q1
2
4
6
2
4
6
/1.4 1
3
5 /1.4 1
3
5
/1.1
12
-K2
-K1
A1 A2 SPE/PE
-A1
A
B
T1 T2 6
10
1
2
3
4
5
-A3
READY
GEN. FAULT
OVERLOAD
CURRENT UNBALANCE
PHASE FAILURE
LOCKING PROTECTION
CURRENT DETECTION
LEFT
RIGHT
OFF
RESET/TEST
7
3UF50 BASIC UNIT
7
8
A1
-K1
-X1 6
5
/1.4
4
2N
/1.7
9
11
3UF52 OPERATOR CONTROL MODULE
A1
-K2
A2
/1.7
A2
4
-X19
NSA0_00144b
-X2
1
2
3
-H1
FAULT
UV W
-M1
M
/1.5
2N.
PE
3AC
Further circuit diagrams for the control functions overload, direct
online starter, wye-delta starter, pole reversing, Dahlander
circuit, solenoid valve, gate valve (servo drives) and 3RW2 2 soft
starter and a configuration example are included in the 3UF5 7
system manual.
■ More information
System manual
Internet
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended
that the 3UF5 7 system manual is consulted.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
7/34
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
http://www.siemens.com/simocode-dp
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
■ Overview
The 3UF1 8 current transformers are protection transformers and
are used for actuating overload relays. Protection transformers
are designed to ensure proportional current transfer up to a
multiple of the primary rated current. The 3UF18 current
transformers convert the maximum current of the corresponding
operating range into the standard signal 1 A secondary.
■ Technical specifications
Climatic environmental conditions
Temperatures
• Operation
• Storage/transport
°C
°C
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +85
Temperature changes
• Operation
• Storage/transport
°C/h
°C/h
max. 10
max. 20
Relative humidity
%
15 ... 95 (indoor, acc. to IEC 60721-3, no condensation)
Air pressure
• Operation
• Storage/transport
hPa
hPa
860 ... 1060
650 ... 1060
Contaminants
• SO2
• H2S
ppm
ppm
0.5 (relative humidity ˆ 60 %, no condensation)
0.1 (relative humidity ˆ 60 %, no condensation)
Mechanical environmental conditions
Vibrations
(acc. to IEC 60068-2-6)
Hz
Hz
10 ... 57 (for constant amplitude 0.15 nm)
57 ... 150 (for constant acceleration 2 g)
12 shocks (half sine 15 g/11 ms)
Shock (acc. to IEC 60068-2-27)
Requirements acc. to IEC and DIN
IP20
Rated insulation voltage
V
690/1000 (type-dependent)
Rating of the insulation
(acc. to UL/CSA)
V
600
Trip class (acc. to IEC 60947-4-1)
Suitable from CLASS 5 to CLASS 30
Power loss per conducting path of the
transformers
Operating range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A
12.5 ... 50
25 ... 100
32 ... 130
50 ... 200
100 ... 400
125 ... 500
160 ... 630
205 ... 820
3UF18 45
3UF18 48
3UF18 50
3UF18 52
3UF18 56
3UF18 57
3UF18 68-3F
3UF18 68-3G
on secondary side
• Tightening torque
• Tightening torque
to the upper limit
mW (mVA)
33 (38)
110 (120)
135 (150)
170 (190)
450 (500)
850 (940)
900 (1000)
1400 (1600)
mW (mVA)
570 (650)
1700 (1900)
2400 (2700)
2600 (2900)
6500 (7000)
13000 (15000)
17000 (19000)
22000 (25000)
on primary side
3UF18 45
Terminal screw
Solid
Stranded
Finely stranded without end sleeve
Finely stranded with end sleeve
Finely stranded with cable lug
Stranded with cable lug
Connecting bars
to the lower limit
Current transformers
Conductor cross-sections
(one or two conductors connectable)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
for setting ...
7
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm
M 3.5
2 ™ 1.5 ... 2.5
2 ™ 1.5 ... 2.5
-2 ™ 1.5
----
Nm
lb
0.8 ... 1.4
7 ... 12
for connection data
see 3RT
Contactors
3UF18 481) 3UF18 501)
3UF18 52 3UF18 56
3UF18 572)
for connec- for connec- M 8
M 10
tion data
tion data
--see 3RT
see 3RT
-Contactors Contactors -----35 ... 95
50 ... 2403)
50 ... 120 70 ... 2403)
20 ™ 4
25 ™ 6.30 ™
6
10 ... 14
14 ... 24
89 ... 124 124 ... 210
3UF18 683FA002)
M 10
----50 ... 240
70 ... 240
30 ™ 5
3UF18 683GA002)
M 12
----185 ... 240
185 ... 240
50 ™ 5
14 ... 24
124 ... 210
14 ... 24
124 ... 210
1) With or without box terminal.
2) Conductor cross-sections for box terminals, see 3TF6 8 and 3TF6 9
contactors in the section Contactors and Contactor Assemblies.
3) With max. conductor cross-section, a terminal cover for maintaining the
phase spacing is required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/35
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for
short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V1), 50/60 Hz
Overload relays
Contactors Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A
with 400 V and Class ...
5 and 10
15
20
25
30
Type of coordination2)
1
Fuse links in A
2
3)
LV HRC, Type 3NA
DIAZED, Type 5SB
NH TYPE
3ND
British
Standards
fuses
aM
BS88
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG
Operating range 0.25 ... 2.5 A
3UF18 43-1BA00
3RT1 015
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
25
10
--
--
7
9
12
12
12.5
7
9
11
12
12.5
7
9
10
12
12.5
7
9
9.5
12
12.5
7
9
9
12
12.5
25
25
25
35
35
10
10
10
16
16
---20
20
---35
35
7
9
12
12
17
25
---
7
9
11
12
17
18
25
--
7
9
10
12
16
16
22.3
25
7
9
9.5
12
15
15
20.3
25
7
9
9
12
14
14
19.1
25
25
25
25
63
63
63
63
63
10
10
10
25
25
25
25
25
---20
20
35
---
---35
35
50
---
17
25
32
40
50
----
17
18
25.5
33
38.5
50
---
16
16
22.3
29.4
32.7
49
50
--
15
15
20.3
28
29.4
45
47
50
14
14
19.1
26.5
26.5
41.7
45
50
63
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
25
35
63
63
80
80
80
80
20
35
-------
35
50
-------
32
40
50
65
65
-65
25.5
33
38.5
56
61
65
65
22.3
29.4
32.7
49
53
59
65
20.3
28
29.4
45
47
53
65
19.1
26.5
26.5
41.7
45
50
65
125
125
160
160
160
160
160
63
63
80
125
125
125
125
--------
--------
65
80
95
100
---
65
61
69
93
100
--
49
53
59
82
100
--
45
47
53
75
98
100
41.7
45
50
69
90
100
250
250
250
250
250
250
125
160
160
160
160
160
---125
125
125
---125
125
125
Operating range 1.25 ... 12.5 A
3UF18 43-1AA00
3RT1 015
3RT1 016
3RT1 017
3RT1 024
3RT1 025
Operating range 2.5 ... 25 A
3UF18 43-2BA00
3RT1 015
3RT1 016
3RT1 017
3RT1 024
3RT1 025
3RT1 026
3RT1 034
3RT1 035
Operating range 12.5 ... 50 A
3UF18 45-2CA00
3RT1 025
3RT1 026
3RT1 034
3RT1 035
3RT1 036
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
7
Operating range 16 ... 65 A
3UF18 47-2DA00
3RT1 034
3RT1 035
3RT1 036
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
3RT1 054
Operating range 25 ... 100 A
3UF18 48-2EA00
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
3RT1 054
3RT1 055
3RT1 056
1) Voltage tolerance –5 %.
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination 1:
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination 2:
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.
There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Note the operational voltage.
7/36
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
Overload relays
Contactors Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A
with 400 V and Class ...
5 and 10
15
20
25
30
Type of coordination1)
1
2
Fuse links in A2)
LV HRC, Type 3NA
DIAZED, Type 5SB
NH TYPE
3ND
British
Standards
fuses
aM
BS88
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG
Operating range 32 ... 130 A
3UF18 50-3AA00
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
3RT1 054
3RT1 055
3RT1 056
3RT1 064
65
80
95
115
130
---
56
61
69
93
122
130
--
49
53
59
82
107
130
--
45
47
53
75
98
120
130
41.7
45
50
69
90
111
130
250
250
250
315
315
315
315
125
160
160
224
224
224
224
---160
160
160
160
---160
160
160
160
115
150
185
200
----
93
122
150
182
200
---
82
107
131
160
188
200
--
75
98
120
146
172
195
200
69
90
111
135
159
180
200
355
355
355
355
355
355
355
224
224
224
224
224
224
224
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
185
225
250
----
150
182
215
243
250
--
131
160
188
213
250
--
120
146
172
195
250
--
111
135
159
180
240
250
355
400
500
500
500
500
250
250
400
400
400
400
160
250
315
315
400
400
200
355
355
355
355
355
265
300
400
---
215
243
324
400
--
188
213
284
355
400
172
195
260
325
400
159
180
240
300
400
500
500
630
630
800
400
400
500
500
500
315
315
400
500
630
400
400
450
450
450
300
400
500
---
243
324
405
500
--
213
284
355
500
--
195
260
325
479
500
180
240
300
441
500
500
800
800
800
800
400
500
500
500
500
315
400
500
630
630
400
450
450
450
450
400
500
630
--
324
405
630
--
284
355
536
--
260
325
479
531
240
300
441
500
800
800
1000
1000
500
500
500
500
400
500
630
630
450
450
450
450
630
820
630
662
536
572
479
531
441
500
1000
1000
500
500
630
630
450
450
Operating range 50 ... 200 A
3UF18 52-3BA00
3RT1 054
3RT1 055
3RT1 056
3RT1 064
3RT1 065
3RT1 066
3RT1 075
Operating range 63 ... 250 A
3UF18 54-3CA00
3RT1 056
3RT1 064
3RT1 065
3RT1 066
3RT1 075
3RT1 076
Operating range 100 ... 400 A
3UF18 56-3DA00
3RT1 065
3RT1 066
3RT1 075
3RT1 076
3TF6 8
3RT1 066
3RT1 075
3RT1 076
3TF6 8
3TF6 9
7
Operating range 125 ... 500 A
3UF18 57-3EA00
Operating range 160 ... 630 A
3UF18 68-3FA00
3RT1 075
3RT1 076
3TF6 8
3TF6 9
Operating range 200 ... 820 A
3UF18 69-3GA00
3TF6 8
3TF6 9
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination 1:
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination 2:
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.
There is a risk of contact welding.
2) Note the operational voltage.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/37
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
■ Dimensional drawings
3UF18 43 current transformer
3UF18 45 current transformer
for stand-alone installation: for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm
standard mounting rails according to EN 50022
9
M 4
1 )
6
5 5
4 5
1 )
1 0 2
6
5 6
8 9
3 5
8 7
3 5
4 5
9 4
5
5
0
M 3 ,5
5 6
8 8
8
2 )
M 4
6
1 0
9
8
3
7 5
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 5 5
2 )
6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 5 6
4 ,5
1) Clearance to grounded components.
2) Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
EN 50022-35 x 7.5 or EN 50022-35 x 15
3UF18 47 to 3UF18 52 current transformers
j
b
h
6,2
i
d
k
e
f
q
l
g
a
m
a
1 Additional cover, can be shortened
Transformers Contactors
a
3UF1 847
3UF1 848
26,5 25
26,5 25
3RT1 044
3RT1 045
3RT1 046
3UF1 850
3UF1 852
37
42
b
d
e
f
82
82
111 122
111 122
g
37,5 71,5 99 114
37,5 71,5 102 122
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
10,5 90
10,5 90
46
46
90
90
105
105
35
35
62
62
89
89
Ø 6,2
Ø 6,2
15
20
41
42
120 95
120 95
33
33
67
67
98
98
Ø 6,6
Ø9
110
110
3UF1 854 to 3UF1 857 current transformers
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 6
6 2
1 3 4
1 1 0
9
8 8
7
NSA0_00157b
n
1
j
i
5 0
1 4 5
1 1 fo r M
T ra n s fo rm e rs
i
3 U F 1 8 5 4
3 U F 1 8 5 6
3 U F 1 8 5 7
4 8
2 5
5 2
3 0
7/38
j
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
1 0
0 ,5
1 0
6
1 2 7
6 6
1 5
q
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
3UF18 68-3FA00, 3UF18 68-3GA00 current transformers
For 3TF68 contactors
70
c
230
70
100
28
14 for M 12
b
g
a
232
220
210
12
14 for M 12
230
74
e
f
174
140
105
12
NSA0_00159
d
0,5
15
15
40
170
Contactors
3UF18 68-3FA00 3TF68
3UF18 68-3GA00 3TF68
a
b
c
d
e
f
390
410
398
408
30
40
5
8
145 175
155 195
g
420
450
7
Transformers
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/39
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
3UL22 summation current transformers
■ Overview
The 3UL22 summation current transformers sense fault currents
in machines and plants. Together with the 3UL21 evaluation unit
or the SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control device
they enable residual-current and ground-fault monitoring.
■ Technical specifications
Summation current transformers
Type
3UL22 .1
3UL22 .2
AC
50/60 Hz
690 V
Rated fault current IDn
• Without response delay
• With response delay
A
A
0.3 ... 1
1
Permissible ambient temperatures
°C
-20 ... +70
Feed-through openings
mm
For Protodur cables
can be fed through
Rated insulation voltage Ui
1000 V
0.3 ... 40
1 ... 40
0.3 ... 40
1 ... 40
40
65
120
max. mm²
4 x 95
4 x 240
8 x 300
b1
b3
■ Dimensional drawings
3UL22 summation current transformers
a1
a2
a3
b4
b3
b2
b1
b5
NSB00364
a4
a5
Z3
c1
c2
c3
A2
Z1
Z2
7
a6
Type
3UL22 1-A
3UL22 2-A
3UL22 3-A
7/40
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
100 75 10
125 95 10
200 165 20
15
15
20
for M 4
for M 4
for M 4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
a6
3UL22 .3
b2
b4
b5
c1
80 85 72,5 42,5 7,5 40 65
100 110 97,5 55
7,5 65 70
170 200 100 100 10 120 85
c2
c3
50
60
70
40
45
55
LOGO! Logic Modules
General data
■ Overview
■ Design
The LOGO! modular design is available in different variants for
different supply voltages (12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC,
115/230 V DC, 115/230 V AC):
• Basic variants
• Low-cost pure variants without operator control and display
panels
The LOGO! variants have the following distinguishing
characteristics:
• R: Relay output
• C: Clock/time switch
• o: Without display
Catalog ST 70
Information on LOGO! can also be found in the catalog ST 70:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/
simatic/ftp/st70/html_00/st70k1ad.pdf
LOGO! is space-saving:
• e.g. LOGO! 230RC: 72 x 90 x 55 mm (W x H x D)
• Fitted mounting in the distribution box (same mounting
dimensions as the ground-fault circuit interrupter)
LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:
• Expandability:
Depending on the application, additional expansion modules
can be connected
LOGO! is communication-capable:
• Optional communication modules support interfacing to
AS-Interface and instabus EIB networks
■ Function
LOGO! is simple:
• 36 functions:
Integrated basic functions (e.g. AND, OR) and special
functions (e.g. timers, counters, latching relays, PI controllers)
of the electronics
• Program generation simply by combining stored functions at
the press of a key or PC software
• Easy-to-use and simple duplication of the control program
with an optional program module
LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:
• Easy modification by reconnecting the functions at a press of
a key; no need for time-consuming rewiring
• Optional operation from the PC:
For creating, simulating, online testing and archiving the
control program on the PC, including documentation facility
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/41
7
• The compact, user-friendly, and low-cost solution for simple
control tasks
• Compact, user-friendly, can be used universally without
accessories
• "All in one": the display and operator panel are integrated
• 36 different functions can be linked at a press of a button or
with PC software; up to 130 times in total
• Functions can be changed simply using buttons;
no complicated rewiring
LOGO! is simple:
• Warning and switching off in one unit; no other tools are
required
• Non-volatile storage of control program and setpoints
(e.g. times) in integrated EEPROM
LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Modular basic variants
■ Overview
■ Function
• The space-saving basic variants
• With interface for connection of expansion modules
■ Design
7
• Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal
(not LOGO! 24)
• Integrated front panel with background illumination
(4x12 characters)
• Integrated operator control panel
• Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints
• Optional program module
• Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime
changeover (not LOGO! 24)
• 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs
• 2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs
• 2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used
(for DC variants only)
• Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs can be addressed
7/42
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
• Integrated basic and special functions:
- Basic functions:
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative
flank evaluation
- Special functions:
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, text and variable
display, shift register, softkey function, PI controller, ramp
function, analog multiplexer
• 130 function blocks can be combined
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)
• Integrated retentivity
• Password protection
Optional function
• Additional know-how protection with the optional program
module
LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Modular pure variants
• The cost-optimized basic variants
• With integrated interface for connection of expansion modules
■ Design
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal
Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints
Optional program module
Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime
changeover (not LOGO! 24o)
8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs
2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs
2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used
(for DC variants only)
Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs can be addressed
■ Function
• Integrated basic and special functions:
- Basic functions:
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative
flank evaluation
- Special functions:
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, shift register,
softkey function, PI controller, ramp function, analog
multiplexer
• 130 function blocks can be combined
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)
• Integrated retentivity
• Password protection
Optional function
• Additional know-how protection with the optional program
module
7
■ Overview
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/43
LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Software
■ Overview
■ Function
• Control program generation with the programming languages
FBD and LAD (switchable). How to place the functions on the
drawing board by means of "Drag and Drop" is almost selfexplanatory
• Comprehensive documentation functions:
Various print options permit professional documentation
• Program simulation (offline):
For preliminary text of switching programs on the PC
• Program test (online):
The current values of LOGO! are presented on screen
• Comprehensive, context-sensitive online help functions
• The user-friendly software for switchgear program generation
on the PC
• Switchgear program generation for function diagrams (FBD)
or contact diagrams (LAD)
• Additional testing, simulation, online testing and archiving of
the switchgear programs
• Professional documentation with the help of various comment
and print functions
■ Design
The connection between LOGO! and the PC is established with
the help of the LOGO! PC cable (serial interface)
Minimum system requirements
7
Windows 98 SE, NT 4.0, ME, 2000 or XP
• Pentium PC
• 90 MB free on hard disk
• 64 MB RAM
• SVGA graphics card with minimum 800x600 resolution
(256 colors)
Mac OS X
• PowerMac G3, G4, G4 Cube, iMac, PowerBook G3, G4 or
iBook
Linux (tested with Caldera OpenLinux 2.4)
• Runs on all Linux releases on which Java 2 SDK Version 1.3.1
runs
• Please consult your Linux release for hardware requirements
7/44
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
The following functions are available:
• Basic functions (AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive
edge evaluation, negative edge evaluation)
• ON delay
• OFF delay
• Current impulse relay
• Latching
• Latching ON delay
• Operating hours meter
• Interval time-delay relay/pulse output mode
• Up/down counter
• Threshold switch
• Pulse encoder
• Twelve-month time switch
• Time switch
• ON/OFF delay
• Random generator
• Edge-triggered interval time-delay relay
• Analog threshold switch
• Analog comparator
• Analog delta threshold switch
• Analog watchdog
• Analog amplifier
• Staircase lighting switch
• Easy-to-use switch
• Message texts
• Shift register
• Softkey
• PI controller
• Ramp function
• Analog multiplexer
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
General data
■ Function
3RP15/3RP20/7PV function table
7PV33
B1)
3RP15 7.
7
3RP15 55
7
7
3RP15 40
7
7
3RP15 3.
3RP15 25
A
7
3RP15 27
3RP15 1.
Contact open
7PV timing
relay
Identification
letter
Contact closed
3RP15 05-.A
Timing relay energized
3RP19 01-0A
3RP20 timing re- 3RP15 timing relay and
lay and 3RP19 01 3RP19 01 label set
label set
3RP20 25
Function chart
3RP20 05-.A
Function
1 CO contact
A1/A2
NSB00858
ON-delay
15/18
15/16
7
t
OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
7
A1/A2
72)
7
> 35 ms
NSB00859
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
7
> 200 ms
A1/A2
NSB00860
OFF-delay
without auxiliary voltage
15/18
15/16
t
A1/A2
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
Clock-pulse,
starting with interval
(dead interval, pulse time, and
time setting ranges each
separately adjustable)
A1/A2
Passing make contact
A1/A2
NSB00862
A1/A2
7
C1)
7
7
D
t
t
Flashing,
starting with interval
(pulse/interval 1:1)
7
NSB00861
ON-delay and
OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage
(t = ton = toff)
15/18
15/16
t
7
NSB00863
t
73)
15/18
15/16
Interval
NSB00864
Pulse period
15/18
15/16
7
7
E
7
7
F1)
7
7
G1)
7
7
H1)
74)
t
A1/A2
> 35 ms
NSB00865
B1/A2
7
Passing break contact
with auxiliary voltage
15/18
15/16
t
A1/A2
75)
>35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00867
Pulse-forming with
auxiliary voltage
(pulse generation
at the output does not depend
on duration of energizing)
15/18
15/16
t
Additive ON-delay
with auxiliary voltage
A1/A2
t1
t3
t2
NSB00868
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
ON-delay
The two-wire timing relay is connected in series with the load. Timing
begins after application of the exciting voltage. The semiconductor
output then becomes conducting,
and the load is energized.
A1/A2
t
NSB00869a
1 NO contact (semiconductor)
7
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
3) For the flashing function, the start between interval D and pulse Di is
selectable.
2) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter C.
5) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter B.
4) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter H.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/45
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
General data
2 CO contacts
ON-delay
A1/A2
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
A
7
NSB00871
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
NSB00872
t
ON-delay
and instantaneous contact
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
A!
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage
A1/A2
7
B1)
> 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00873
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
NSB00874
OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
and instantaneous contact
> 35ms
B1/A2
B!1)
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay without
auxiliary voltage
7
> 200 ms
A1/A2
NSB00875
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
NSB00876
t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage (t = ton = toff)
A1/A2
B1/A2
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
C1)
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
NSB00877
t
A1/A2
B1/A2
C!1)
15/18
15/16
t
t
Flashing,
starting with interval
(pulse/interval 1:1)
NSB00878
21/24
21/22
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
7
D
25/28
25/26
t
t
A1/A2
NSB00879
Flashing,
starting with interval
(pulse/interval 1:1)
and instantaneous contact
15/18
15/16
t
D!
t
21/24
21/22
A1/A2
NSB00880
Passing make contact
15/18
15/16
7
E
25/28
25/26
t
Passing make contact
and instantaneous contact
NSB00881
7
t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous
contact (t = ton = toff)
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
7/46
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
E!
3RP15 7.
3RP15 60
3RP15 55
3RP15 40
3RP15 3.
3RP15 27
3RP15 25
3RP15 1.
Identification
letter
3RP19 01-0A
Contact open
3RP15 05-.R
Contact closed
3RP19 01-0B
Timing relay energized
3RP15 05-.B
3RP20 timing relay 3RP15 timing relay and
and 3RP19 01
3RP19 01 label set
label set
3RP20 25
Function chart
3RP20 05-.B
Function
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
General data
3RP15 7.
3RP15 60
3RP15 55
3RP15 40
3RP15 3.
3RP15 27
3RP15 25
3RP15 1.
Identification
letter
3RP19 01-0A
Contact open
3RP15 05-.R
Contact closed
3RP19 01-0B
Timing relay energized
3RP15 timing relay and
3RP19 01 label set
3RP15 05-.B
3RP20 timing
relay and
3RP19 01 label
set
3RP20 25
Function chart
3RP20 05-.B
Function
A1/A2
NSB00882
2 CO contacts
Passing break contact
with auxiliary voltage
> 35ms
B1/A2
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
F1)
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
NSB00883
Passing break contact
with auxiliary voltage
and instantaneous contact
> 35ms
B1/A2
F!1)
15/18
15/16
t
Pulse-forming
with auxiliary voltage
(pulse generation
at the output does not depend
on duration of energizing)
A1/A2
NSB00884
21/24
21/22
>35ms
B1/A2
7
G1)
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
NSB00885
t
Pulse-forming
with auxiliary voltage
and instantaneous contact
(pulse generation
at the output does not depend
on duration of energizing)
A1/A2
>35ms
B1/A2
G!1)
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
Additive ON-delay
with auxiliary voltage
7
A1/A2
t1
t2
B1/A2
H1)
t3
NSB00886
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
1
t
t
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 1 a
A ./A 2
3
2
B ./A 2
1 5 /1 8
1 5 /1 6
7
7
H!1)
7
7
*D
7
t
Additive ON-delay
with auxiliary voltage and
instantaneous contact
t
2 1 /2 4
2 1 /2 2
A1/A2
NSB00888
Wye-delta function
17/18
27/28
t
50ms
2 NO contacts
A1/A2
7
NSB00889
Wye-delta function *D
17/18
17/28
t
50 ms
3 NO contacts
7
A1/A2
B1/A2
17/18
50ms
17/28
17/16
t
t
Idling
NSB00890
Wye-delta function
with overtravel function2)
(idling)
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
2) For function diagrams showing the various possibilities of operation of the
3RP15 60-1S.30 (see Page 7/48).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/47
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
General data
3RP15 function table
Possibilities of operation of the 3RP15 60-1S.30 timing relay
Timing relay energized
tY
= star time
Contact closed
tIdling
= idling time (overtravel time) 30 to 600 s
1 to 20 s
Contact open
Operation 1
Operation 1:
A./A2
Start contact B./A2 is opened when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal on
B./A2. This starts the *D timing. The idling time (overtravel time) is
started by applying a control signal to B./A2. When the set time IIdling
(30 to 600 s) has elapsed, the output relays (17/16 and 17/28) are reset.
If the control signal on B./A2 is switched off (minimum OFF period
270 ms), a new timing is started.
B./A2
17/18
Y
Comments:
NSB00891
17/28
17/16
tY
50 ms
tY
t Idling
50 ms
t Idling
Observe response time (dead time) of 400 ms on energizing supply
voltage until contacts 17/18 and 17/16 close.
Operation 2:
Start contact B./A2 is closed when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
300 ms
If the control signal B./A2 is already present when the supply voltage
A./A2 is applied, no timing is started. The timing is only started when the
control signal B./A2 is switched off.
Operation 2
A./A2
Operation 3:
B./A2
Start contact B./A2 closes while star time is running.
If the control signal B./A2 is applied again during the star time, the idling
time starts and the timing is terminated normally.
17/18
Y
Operation 4:
17/28
Start contact B./A2 opens while delta time is running and is applied
again.
17/16
tY
50 ms
If the control signal on B./A2 is applied and switched off again during
the delta time, although the idling time has not yet elapsed, the idling
time (overtravel time) is reset to zero. If the control signal is re-applied to
B./A2, the idling time is restarted.
NSB00892
t Idling
Operation 3
Application example based on standard operation (operation 1)
A./A2
For example, use of 3RP15 60 for compressor control
Frequent starting of compressors strains the network, the machine, and
the increased costs for the operator. The new timing relay prevents
frequent starting at times when there is high demand for compressed
air. A special control circuit prevents the compressor from being
switched off immediately when the required air pressure in the tank has
been reached. Instead, the valve in the intake tube is closed and the
compressor runs in "Idling" mode for a specific time which can be set
from 30 to 600 s.
B./A2
17/28
If the pressure falls within this time, the motor does not have to be
restarted again, but can return to nominal load operation from no-load
operation.
17/16
tY
50 ms
NSB00893
If the pressure does not fall within this idling time, the motor is switched
off.
t Idling
the pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
Operation 4
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and the start contact B./A2 is
open, i.e. there is no control signal on B./A2 when the supply voltage is
applied. The pressure switch signals "too little pressure in system" and
starts the timing by way of terminal B./A2. The compressor is started,
enters *D operation, and fills the pressure tank.
A./A2
B./A2
When the pressure switch signals "sufficient pressure", the control signal
B./A2 is applied, the idling time (overtravel time) is started, and the
compressor enters no-load operation for the set period of time between
30 to 600 s. The compressor is then switched off. The compressor is
only restarted if the pressure switch responds again (low pressure).
17/18
Y
17/28
NSB00894
7
17/18
Y
17/16
tY
50 ms
< t Idling
< t Idling
The following applies to all operations:
The pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
7/48
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
t Idling
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
■ Overview
■ Function
Standards
The timing relays comply with:
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays,
timing relays"
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic
compatibility"
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear,
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"
3RP15 timing relays, width 22.5 mm
LED for indicating
"Time relay on voltage"
Operating time
adjustment
LED for indicating
"Relay switched"
Inspection window for
set time range
Time setting
range selector
switch
Function
switch
• Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be
carried out in the de-energized state
• Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
voltage is applied
• The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be
connected
• The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not
permissible when using AC (see diagrams)
• Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This
prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional
damping measures are necessary
• 3RP15 05-.R must not be operated next to heat sources
> 60 °C
Parallel load on start input
L1
S1
Inspection window for
set function
Decive labeling
plate
NSB0_01423
A1
K2
A2
N
B1
K1
NSB00895
Accessories
L1
Push-in lugs for screw mounting
K1
A1
K2
A2
S1
B1
K1
N
Sealable cap
NSB00896
7
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/49
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
■ Technical specifications
Type
3RP15 05
3RP15 31
3RP15 32
3RP15 33
V AC
Rated insulation voltage
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Operating range at excitation1)
3RP15 40
3RP15 60
3RP15 74
3RP15 76
3RP15 27
300; 500 for 3RP15 05-1BT10
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us with DC;
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
Rated power
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
W
VA
2
6
Rated operational current Ie
• AC-14, DC-13
• AC-15 at 230V, 50 Hz
A
--
0.01 … 0.6
A
33)
--
A
A
A
A
A
1
0.45
0.35
0.2
0.1
------
A
4
--
1/h
1/h
2500
5000
5000
• DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 48 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 230 V
DIAZED fuse4)
gL/gG operational class
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC
22)
1
1
6
Recovery time
ms
150
Minimum ON period
ms
355)
Residual current
with non-conducting output
mA
--
5
Voltage drop
with conducting output
VA
--
3.5
Short-time loading capacity
--
10
(to 10 ms)
Setting accuracy
with reference to scale value
Typical –5 %
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
°C
°C
-25 … +60
-40 … +85
IP40 cover,
IP20 terminals
Conductor cross-sections
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid
1 or 2 conductors); for standard
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve
AWG conductors, solid or stranded
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
Solid
Finely stranded
• With end sleeve
• Without end sleeve
AWG conductors, solid or stranded
mm²
Nm
1 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
M 3.5
0.8 … 1.2
mm²
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm²
mm²
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
mm²
AWG
Any
Permissible
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type
g/ms
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Tests acc. to basic specification
1) If nothing else is stated.
2) Maximum inrush current 1A/100 ms.
3) For 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact -> Ie = 1 A.
4) Ik ˜ 1 kA weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
5) Minimum ON period with 3RP15 05-.BW30, 150 ms, until instantaneous
contact has switched.
6) For correct operation, observe minimum ON period.
7/50
2006)
30 x 106
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
• Spring-loaded terminal
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors; for
22.5 mm timing relay use
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or
8WA2 807 opening tool)
300
--
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
150
50
--
ˆ –1%
Repeat accuracy
7
3RP15 11
3RP15 12
3RP15 13
3RP15 25
3RP15 55
15/11
EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4
100 x 106
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
■ Dimensional drawings
5
86
A
B
C
74
62
90
62
82
110
36
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
15
22,5
A
B
C
3RP15 1
3RP15 25-.A
3RP15 27
3RP15 10-A
3RP15 55
3RP15 7
Type
3RP15 05
3RP15 25-.B
3RP15 3
3RP15 40-.B
3RP15 60
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded terminal
84
94
103
Screw-type terminal
83
92
102
■ Schematics
3RP15 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)
3RP15 05-.A
A2
16 18
A2
16 18
7
A1 A3
A2
ON-delay
OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
ON-delay and OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
Flashing
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 05-.A
Passing make contact
16 18
Passing break contact
with auxiliary voltage
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
15
16 18
Pulse-forming
with auxiliary voltage
NSB00903
16 18
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3
15
NSB00902
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3
15
NSB00901
A1 A3
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
16 18
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
15
~
16 18
NSB00898
A2
NSB00897
15
NSB00900
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
A1 A3
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
3RP15 05-.A
S
A2
16 18
NSB00904
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 3.-.A
NSB00899
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 1.
3RP15 25-.A
Additive ON-delay
with auxiliary voltage
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/51
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
3RP15 55
AC/DC24V
AC/DC100/127V
AC/DC200/240V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC42V...48V
AC/DC60V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
U
Last
A1
15
A2
16 18
A1 A3
A2
AC/DC24...240V
15
~
A1+
A2
NSB00906
NSB00905
AC/DC 24-66V
AC/DC 90-240V
3RP15 05-.AW30
16 18
A1 B1
15
A2
16 18
NSB00908
3RP15 40-.A
U = 24 ... 66 V AC/DC
90 ... 240 V AC/DC
NSB00907
3RP15 27
ON-delay,
two-wire design
OFF-delay
without auxiliary voltage
Clock-pulse relay
Multi-function relay
(same functions as 3RP15 05-1A)
3RP15 05-.B, 3RP15 25-1B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
AC/DC24V
26 28
A2
16 18
26 28
A2
16 18
25
A1 A3
26 28
A2
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage
ON-delay and OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
Flashing
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
A2
25
16 18 26 28
15
A1 B1 A3 B3
A2
25
16 18 26 28
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00915
16 18 26 28
A2
15
A1 B1 A3 B3
25
NSB00914
15
NSB00913
A1 A3
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
26 28
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
25
16 18
ON-delay, 3RP15 25-1B
also for 42...48/60 V AC/DC
(see page 8/13 3RP15 25-1BR30)
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
15
NSB00912
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
25
21
S
A2
16 18 22 24
NSB00916
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00910
25
NSB00909
15
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
~
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A1 A3
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
~
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
NSB00911
AC/DC24V
Passing make contact
Passing break contact with
auxiliary voltage
Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage
Additive ON-delay with auxiliary
voltage and instantaneous contact
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
16 18
22 24
A2
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
21
22 24
A2
16 18
21
22 24
A1 A3
15
21
A2
16 18
22 24
NSB00920
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
~
21
NSB00918
15
NSB00917
A1 A3
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
NSB00919
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
7
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
ON-delay and instantaneous
contact
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage
and instantaneous contact
ON-delay and OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous
contact
Flashing and instantaneous contact
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
A1 B1 A3 B3
21
16 18 22 24
Passing make contact
and instantaneous contact
7/52
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
A2
15
21
16 18 22 24
A1 B1 A3 B3
NSB00922
A2
15
NSB00921
A1 A3
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
Passing break contact with
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous
contact
A2
15
21
16 18 22 24
A1 A3
Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage
and instantaneous contact
A2
17
27
Y18 d28
Wye-delta function
NSB00924
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
NSB00923
AC/DC24V
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 05-.BW30/-1BT20/-.RW30
3RP15 25-. BR30
3RP15 25-. BW30
3RP15 40-.B
AC/DC24...240V
A C /D C 2 4 V
A C /D C 1 0 0 /1 2 7 V
A C /D C 2 0 0 /2 4 0 V
AC/DC42...48V
A C /D C 2 4 ...2 4 0 V
A C 4 0 0 /4 4 0 V
AC/DC60V
1 5 /1 7
2 1 /2 5 /2 7
1 8
2 2 /2 6
2 4 /2 8
25
A2
16 18
26 28
A1
A2
16 18
26 28
ON-delay
ON-delay
3RP15 60-. S
3RP15 7.-.M20
3RP15 74, 3RP15 76
28 16
Y18
A 2
Wye-delta timing relay with
overtravel function (idling)
1 8
2 6
2 8
OFF-delay without
auxiliary voltage
A1 A3
1 7
Y 1 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 2 3
A2
A 1 A 3
NSB00930a
17
1 6
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A C 3 8 0 /4 4 0 V
A1 B1 A3 B3
A 2
A 2
2 5
AC/DC24V
A C 2 0 0 /2 4 0 V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
1 5
A 1
25
Multi-function relay
(for functions see function table)
AC/DC24V
A 1
15
NSB00929a
1 6
15
d 2 8
A2
Wye-delta timing relay
17
Y18 d28
NSB00925
A 2
A1 A3
NSB00928
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 2 7 a
A 1 B 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 2 6 a
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
Wye-delta timing relay
Position of the connection terminals
3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 05-.AA40
1 5
A1 B1 15
fo r 1
c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t
for 2
changeover
contact
A 1
B 1
A 3
B 3
1 6
A 2
1 8
16
N S B 0 0 9 9 6
.
18
A2
3RP15 05-.AW
16
18
26 28
16 18
A1 A3 15
For 1 CO
contact
For 1 CO
contact
A2
NSB01001
16 18
A2
NSB01002
NSB01000
fo r 1
c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t
1 6
1 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 0 4 a
24/
28
18
A 2
A2
15
A3
25
A1 B1
22/
26
24/
28
16
18
15/
17
21/
25/
27
For 2 CO
contacts
A2
NSB00999
3RP15 27
A1
3RP15 05-1BT
15/
17
21/
25/
27
For 2 CO
contacts
NSB01008
For 2 CO
contacts
22/
26
24/
28
16
18
A2
NSB00999
3RP15 3.
A1
For 1 NO
contact
26 28
16 18
A 1
B 1
A 3
B 3
1 5
fo r 1
c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t
A2
NSB01003
A2
3RP15 55
1 5
A1 B1
1 6
A 2
1 8
N S B 0 0 9 9 6
3RP15 40
A 1
A2
22/
26
16
3RP15 05-.BW
7
A1 A3 15
16 18
A2
A3 B3
21/
25/
27
3RP15 25-1A. or -1B.1)
3RP15 1.
For 2 CO
contacts
15/
17
NSB01007
A1 B1 15
25
A1 B1
For 2 CO
contacts
For 1 CO
contact
NSB0_01605
3RP15 05-.RW
3RP15 05-.BP/-.BQ
A1 B1 15
A 1
1 5
A 1
2 5
fo r 2
c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c ts
2 6
2 8
A 2
1 6
1 8
A 2
3RP15 60
3RP15 7.
A1 B1 17
A1 A3 15
For 1 CO
contact
16 18
A2
NSB01001
A3 B3
A1 A3 17
For 1 NO
contact
16
For 1 NO
contact
18
18 28
A2
28 A2
NSB01006
NSB01005
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.
1) Depending on the version.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/53
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
3RP15 circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits)
with 3RP15 74 and 3RP15 76 wye-delta timing relays
Control circuit (example circuit)
with 3RP15 60 wye-delta timing relays
For pushbutton operation
For maintained-contact operation
Size S00 to S3
Size S00 to S3
L 1 (L + ) A C
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
F0
F1
F 0
95
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC ...V)
5 0 H z (D C ) ...V
F 1
96
Legend:
S0 button "OFF"
S1 button "ON"
S maintained-contact button
K1 line contactor
K2 star contactor
K3 delta contactor
K4 timer or timing relay
F0 fuse
F1 overload relay
P1 pressure switch
F0
9 5
S1
9 6
S0
S
S1
K1
K1
28
18
K3
N(L )
K 1
43
17
K4
K4
4 4
44
K2
42
41
K2
K3
33
13
34
14
K2
K4
K 3
K 4
K1
N (L
)
K 2
3 4
2 8
1 8
21
3 3
K 1
K 4
22
NSB00950a
4 3
1 7
4 2
K 2
4 1
K 3
K 2
1 3
1 4
K 3
1 3
1 4
K3
2 2
2 1
K2
K 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 1 c
17
18
22
21
A1
A2
K4
K2
K3
17
28
K4
11
17
16
14
22
21
A1
A2
K1
A1
A1 B1
A2
A2
N(L )
NSB01126
7
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the star stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the
de-energized state.
7/54
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
12
P1
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
■ Overview
■ Function
Standards
The timing relays comply with:
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays,
timing relays"
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic
compatibility"
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear,
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"
• EN 61140 "Safe electrical isolation"
• Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be
carried out in the de-energized state
• Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
voltage is applied
• The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be
connected
• The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not
permissible when using AC (see diagrams)
• Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This
prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional
damping measures are necessary
3RP20 timing relay, width 45 mm
Timing relay with multifunction
LED for indicating
"Time relay excited"
(left)
The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches.
Indicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the
3RP20 05 timing relay clearly and unmistakably.
LED for indicating
"Relay switched"
(right)
Function
switch
Time setting
range selector
switch
NSB0_01424
Device labeling
plate
Time setting
range adjuster,
analog
The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory.
The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B..
3RP20 05 with one changeover contact
Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.A.
3RP20 05 with two changeover contacts
Accessories
Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.B.
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
Parallel load on start input
L1
S1
B1
K1
NSB00895
7
A1
K2
A2
N
L1
K1
A1
K2
A2
N
S1
B1
K1
NSB00896
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/55
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
■ Technical specifications
Type
3RP20 05
3RP20 25
V AC
Rated insulation voltage
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Operating range at excitation1)
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us with DC;
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
Rated power
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
W
VA
1
4
Rated operational current Ie
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz
• DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 48 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 230 V
A
3
A
A
A
A
A
1
0.45
0.35
0.2
0.1
A
4
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC
1/h
1/h
2500
5000
Recovery time
ms
150
Minimum ON period
ms
35
DIAZED fuse2)
gL/gG operational class
Typical –5 %
Setting accuracy
with reference to scale value
ˆ –1%
Repeat accuracy
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
30 x 106
°C
°C
Conductor cross-sections
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid
1 or 2 conductors); for standard
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve
AWG conductors, solid or stranded
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
• Spring-loaded terminal
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors;
for 22.5 mm timing relay use
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or
8WA2 807 opening tool)
-25 … +60
-40 … +85
IP40 cover,
IP20 terminals
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
7
300
Solid
Finely stranded
• With end sleeve
• Without end sleeve
AWG conductors, solid or stranded
mm²
Nm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2 x (18 ... 14)
M3
0.8 … 1.2
mm²
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm²
mm²
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 x (24 ... 14)
mm²
AWG
Any
Mounting position (permissible)
15/11
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type
g/ms
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Tests acc. to basic specification
1) If nothing else is stated.
2) Ik ˜ 1 kA, weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1.
7/56
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
■ Dimensional drawings
5
4 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 5 0
5 0
5 7
5 5
S IE M E N S
6 8
5
3 5
■ Schematics
3RP20 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)
3RP20 05
AC/DC24V
16 18
A2
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00898
A2
NSB00897
15
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
A1 A3
AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A2
A1 A3
16 18
A2
ON-delay
OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
ON-delay and OFF-delay
with auxiliary voltage
3RP20 05
3RP20 05
3RP20 05
AC/DC24V
16 18
16 18
A2
Passing make contact
15
A1 B1 A3 B3
NSB00902
A2
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A1 B1 A3 B3
15
NSB00901
A1 A3
Flashing
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
16 18
Passing break contact
with auxiliary voltage
A2
15
NSB00903
AC/DC24V
15
~
AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
3RP20 05
NSB00900
3RP20 05
NSB00899
3RP20 05
3RP20 25
16 18
Pulse-forming
with auxiliary voltage
Position of the connection terminals
1 5
1 6
3RP20 25-.A
A 3
1 8
N S B 0
A 1
1 5
A 2
1 6
0 1 1 9 6 a
3RP20 05-.BW30
A 3
A 1
1 8
15/17 21/25/
27
A 2
N S B 0
0 1 1 9 6 a
16
18
B1
7
3RP20 05-.A
A1
22/26 24/28
A2
NSB0_01392
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/57
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
7PV timing relays for panel mounting
■ Technical specifications
Type
7PV33 48
V AC
Rated insulation voltage
Overvoltage category C to DIN VDE 0110
250
+10 ... -15 %
Operating range of excitation
Rated power
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
W
VA
1
11
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-1 at AC 230 V, 50 Hz
A
8
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC
• When loaded with 3RT16 contactor, AC 230 V
1/h
1/h
600
--
Recovery time
ms
50
Minimum ON period
ms
50
Setting accuracy
• With reference to upper limit of scale
– 0.03 %
– 10 ms
Repeat accuracy
– 0.03 %
– 10 ms
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
5 x 106
°C
°C
-10 ... +60
-30 ... +70
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
IP65
Permissible mounting positions
Any
■ Dimensional drawings
7PV33
LZX:MT78750 socket accessory, for 7PV33
NSB01127a
1 ,5
64
70,4
48
2 4 ,2
5,5
14,5
4
3 8
Panel cutout
45
47
+0,6
0
47
45
33
7/58
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
20,5
7
47
7
Frame for panel
mounting
Positioning screw
9 ,3
2 6
7PX9921 socket accessory with rear connection
+0,6
0
Control panel thickness 1 to 3,5 mm
3 2 ,3
7 0
1 0 0 °
48
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 8 2 b
NSB01124a
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
7PV timing relays for panel mounting
■ Schematics
7PV internal schematics (terminal designation according to DIN 46199, Part 5)
2
11
2 11 5
A1
B1
1
15
A2
10
16 18
4 3
AC/DC
AC110 - 240V
ON-delay (A)
2
11
2 11 5
A1
B1
1
15
A2
10
16 18
4 3
11
2
11
1
15
~
2 11 5
A1
B1
A2
10
16 18
4 3
AC/DC
24V
AC110 - 240V
2
11
2
11
2 11 5
A1
B1
1
15
~
AC110 - 240V
11
AC/DC
24V
AC110 - 240V
7PV33 48-2AX34
2
11
2
11
2 11 5
A1
B1
1
15
A2
10
16 18
4 3
AC/DC
24V
AC110 - 240V
Passing make contact (H)
2
11
2
11
2 11 5
A1
B1
1
15
A2
10
16 18
4 3
Pulse-forming with
auxiliary voltage (B)
7PV33 48-2AX34
2
NSB01113a
24V
7PV33 48-2AX34
2
OFF-delay with
auxiliary voltage (C)
7PV33 48-2AX34
AC/DC
24V
NSB01112a
11
NSB01111a
AC110 - 240V
7PV33 48-2AX34
2
A2
10
Flashing, starting with interval (D)
16 18
4 3
NSB01114a
24V
NSB01109a
AC/DC
NSB01110a
7PV33 48-2AX34
. Important!
Flashing, starting with pulse (Di)
The terminal designations for 7PV are different from the
designations for the 3RP1 terminals.
Position of the connection terminals
9
8
7
5
3
4
4
5
B 1
1 8
1 6
1 6
B 1
1 5
A 1
1 8
A 1
1 5
1
2
3
2
1
A 2
1 0
1 1
7PX9 921 socket
for 7PV33 timing relays
6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 1 b
7
6
8
A 2
1 1
1 0
9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 2 b
7
LZX: MT78750 socket
for 7PV33 timing relays
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/59
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors
■ Technical specifications
According to IEC 61 812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021
Type
3RT19 16-2C
3RT19 16-2D
3RT19 26-2C
3RT19 26-2D
Rated insulation voltage
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III to DIN VDE 0110
V AC
3RT19 16-2E
3RT19 16-2F
3RT19 16-2G
3RT19 16-2L
3RT19 26-2E
3RT19 26-2F
3RT19 26-2G
300
0.8...1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
0.85...1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
W
VA
1
1
2 (1 W for 3RT1916-2L)
4
Rated operational currents Ie
• AC-14 and DC-13
A
A
A
A
A
0.3 for 3RT1916
0.5 for 3RT1926
-----
--
•
•
•
•
DIAZED fuse
gL/gG operational class
A
--
4
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC
• When loaded with 3RT1016 contactor, 230 V AC
1/h
1/h
2500
2500
2500
5000
Recovery time
ms
50
150
Minimum ON period
ms
35
200 (OFF-delay,
without auxiliary voltage)
3RT1916-2L: 35 (OFF-delay,
with auxiliary voltage)
Residual current
(two-wire)
Voltage drop
with conducting output
Short-time loading capacity
mA
ˆ5
--
VA
ˆ 3.5
--
A
10 (to 10 ms)
--
Operating range of excitation
Rated power
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 110 V
DC-13 at 230 V
ˆ –15 %
Setting accuracy
with reference to upper limit of scale
ˆ –1%
Repeat accuracy
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
100 x 106
°C
°C
7
Solid
mm²
Finely stranded with end sleeve
Solid or stranded
mm²
AWG
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +85
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),
2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (18 ... 14)
M3
Terminal screw
Nm
Tightening torque
0.8 ... 1.2
Any
Permissible mounting position
Shock resistance
Half sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
g/ms
15/11
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm
10 ... 55 / 0.35
IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
EMC tests
acc. to basic specification
Overvoltage protection
7/60
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
10 x 106
IP 40 cover
IP 20 terminals
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
Connection of conductors
3
1
0.2
0.1
Varistor
Integrated into timing relay
Integrated into 3RT19 16
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors
■ Dimensional drawings
3RT19 16-2E, -2F, -2G, -2L
solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
for size S00 contactors and contactor relays
3RT19 26-2C
mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3
45
41
50
4
40
66
NSB00985
38
38
6
5 9
75
NSB00988
45
3RT19 26-2E, -2F, -2G
for size S0 to S3 contactors and contactor relays
73
5 12
33
NSB00989
16
38
46
NSB00986
25
46
3RT19 16-2D solid-state time-delay blocks, OFF-delay
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors
9 5
38
45
3RT19 16-2C solid-state time-delay blocks, ON-delay
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors
3RT19 26-2D
mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3
38
4
50
26
NSB00987
41
45
6 11
38
7
NSB00990
45
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/61
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors
■ Schematics
3RT19 circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits)
with delayed 3RT19 .6-2G wye-delta auxiliary switch block
For pushbutton operation
Size S00
Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
F0
F1
L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V
95
F0
F1
96
S0
95
96
S0
S1
K1
S1
13
K1
14
K4
K3
K1
K4
27
37
28
38
22
21
K2
K4
22
K3
21
K3
K2
K4
N(L )
K2
(.3)
(.4)
K1
27
38
28
37
(.2)
(.2)
(.1)
K2
(.3)
(.3)
(.4)
(.4)
K2
(.1)
K3
K1
N(L )
NSB00947
NSB00946a
For maintained-contact operation
Size S00
Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
F0
F1
L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V
95
F0
F1
96
Legend:
95
96
S
S
K1
K2
K2
K1
27
38
28
37
(.2)
K4
38
22
21
(.3)
37
27
K3
22
K3
21
(.2)
Maintained-contact switch
K4
K2
K2
(.4)
(.3)
K1
Line contactor
K2
K3
(.4)
Star contactor
14
K3
Delta contactor
K4
Timer or timing relay
F0
Fuse
F1
Overload relay
K2
(.1)
K3
N(L )
(.1)
K3
K1
N(L )
NSB00948a
NSB0_00949a
The 27/28 contact element for the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with wye-delta function is
only closed on the delta level; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized
state.
Solid-state timing relay blocks
for size S00 to S3 3RT10 contactors and 3RH11 contactor relays
3RT19 16-2D.../3RT19 26-2D...
L1/L+
L1/L+
A1
1
2
A1
A1
A2
1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
2
A1
A2
A1 B1
S1
A2
1
2
A1
A2
A1
A2
NSB00945a
3RT19 26-2C...
L1/L+
NSB00944
3RT19 16-2C...
NSB00943
7
"ON" button
S
13
14
28
K1
"OFF" button
S1
13
K4
K4
S0
N/L
N/L
N/L
ON-delay
ON-delay
OFF-delay
(with auxiliary voltage)
7/62
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
$
%
--✖
Timing relay block
Contactor
Can be connected
Do not connect!
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
■ Overview
Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection
for mobile machines and plants or for unstable networks.
Network and voltage faults can be detected early and rectified
before far greater damage ensues.
Depending on the version, the relays monitor phase sequence,
phase failure with and without N conductor monitoring, phase
unbalance, undervoltage or overvoltage. With the 3UG46 17
or 3UG46 18 relay, a wrong direction of rotation can also be
corrected automatically.
■ Function
3UG45 11 monitoring relays
3UG45 12 monitoring relays
The 3UG45 11 phase sequenced relay monitors the phase
sequence in a three-phase network. No adjustments are
required for operation. The device has an internal power supply
and works using the closed-circuit principle. If the phase
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay
picks up after the delay time has elapsed and the LED is lit. If the
phase sequence is wrong, the output relays remain in their rest
position.
The 3UG45 12 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase
networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure and
phase unbalance of 10 %. Thanks to a special measuring
method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide
voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the
load of up to 90 %. The device has an internal power supply and
works using the closed-circuit principle. No adjustments are
required. When the mains supply is switched on, the green LED
is lit. If the phase sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct,
the output relay picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the
red LED flashes and the output relay remains in its rest position.
If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output
relay drops.
Note:
When one phase fails, connected loads (motor windings, lamps,
transformers, coils, etc.) create a feedback voltage at the
terminal of the failed phase due to the network coupling.
Because the 3UG45 11 relays are not resistant to voltage
feedback, such a phase failure is not detected. Should this be
required, then the 3UG45 12 monitoring relay must be used.
Correct phase sequence
Note:
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG45 12 monitoring relay is suitable
for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.
Phase failure
L1-L2-L3
11/14
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
11/12
21/24
21/22
NSB0_01565
7
ON
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01567
Wrong phase sequence
21/24
21/22
L3-L2-L1
LED rd
11/14
OFF
21/22
ON
Phase loss
OFF
Wrong phase sequence
L3-L2-L1
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01568
21/24
NSB0_01566
OFF 11/12
21/24
21/22
LED rd
OFF
FLASH
OFF
Phase sequence
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/63
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
3UG45 13 monitoring relays
3UG46 14 monitoring relays
The 3UG45 13 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase
networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure, phase
unbalance of 20 % and undervoltage. The device has an internal
power supply and works using the closed-circuit principle. The
hysteresis is 5 %. The integrated response delay time is
adjustable from 0 to 20 s and responds to undervoltage. If the
direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately.
Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably
detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC
and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. When the mains
supply is switched on, the green LED is lit. If the phase
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay
picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the red LED flashes
and the output relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails,
the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops.
The 3UG46 14 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range
and an internal power supply. The device is equipped with a
display and is parameterized using three buttons. It monitors
three-phase networks with regard to phase unbalance from 5 to
20 %, phase failure, undervoltage and phase sequence. The
hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition, the device
has a response delay and ON delay from 0 to 20 s in each case.
The integrated response delay time responds to phase
unbalance and undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect, the
device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring
method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide
voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the
load.
Note:
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG45 13 monitoring relay is suitable
for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.
The 3UG46 14 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of
either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with
manual or auto RESET.
With the closed-circuit principle selected
Wrong phase sequence
Phase failure and undervoltage
L3-L2-L1
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
Hysteresis
5%
-20%
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01571
L1-L2-L3
3~U n
21/24
11/14
21/22
11/12
Phase failure
21/24
21/22
L1-L2-L3
NSB0_01569
LED rd
OFF
ON
Phase loss
OFF
Delay
ON
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
OFF
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01576
Wrong phase sequence
21/24
21/22
L3-L2-L1
Undervoltage
11/12
<
Hysteresis
x-y
NSB0_01570
21/24
21/22
11/14
OFF
FLASH
OFF
Phase sequence
NSB0_01577
11/12
LED rd
21/24
21/22
onDelay
Delay
Unbalance
> Asy
Hysteresis
2%
0%
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01578
7
11/14
21/24
21/22
Delay
onDelay
7/64
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relays
3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relays
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 line monitoring relay has a wide
voltage range and an internal power supply. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three
buttons. The 3UG46 15 device monitors three-phase networks
with regard to phase failure, undervoltage, overvoltage and
phase sequence. The 3UG46 16 monitoring relay monitors the
neutral conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to
20 V. In addition the device has two separately adjustable delay
times for overvoltage and undervoltage from 0 to 20 s in each
case. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off
immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase
failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from
160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %.
The 3UG46 17/ 3UG46 18 line monitoring relay has an internal
power supply and can automatically correct a wrong direction of
rotation. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure
is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160
to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. The
device is equipped with a display and is parameterized using
three buttons. The 3UG46 17 line monitoring relay monitors
three-phase networks with regard to phase sequence, phase
failure, phase unbalance, undervoltage and overvoltage. The
3UG46 18 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor as
well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition the
device has delay times from 0 to 20 s in each case. The times
respond to overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure and phase
unbalance. The 3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relay can be
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit
principle and with manual or auto RESET.
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relay can be operated on
the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and
with manual or auto RESET.
With the closed-circuit principle selected
Wrong phase sequence
The one changeover contact is used for warning or switching off
in the event of line faults (voltage, unbalance), the other
responds only to a wrong phase sequence. In conjunction with
a contactor reversing assembly it is thus possible to change the
direction automatically.
L3-L2-L1
With the closed-circuit principle selected
11/12
Phase failure
NSB0_01571
11/14
21/24
21/22
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N
Phase failure
11/14
11/12
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N
NSB0_01587
50 ms
21/24
21/22
Undervoltage
11/14
11/12
21/22
Hysteresis
<
x-y
NSB0_01572
21/24
11/14
11/12
<
NSB0_01588
x-y
50 ms
21/24
Hysteresis
21/22
7
Undervoltage
Delay
11/14
Overvoltage
11/12
>
NSB0_01573
21/24
21/22
Hysteresis
x-y
11/14
Delay
11/12
Overvoltage
NSB0_01589
50 ms
21/24
>
Hysteresis
x-y
21/22
Delay
Unbalance
11/14
11/12
> Asy
Hysteresis
2%
21/24
21/22
Delay
11/14
11/12
50 ms
NSB0_01590
NSB0_01574
0%
21/24
21/22
Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/65
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
■ Technical specifications
3UG45 11..N20
3UG45 11..P20
3UG45 11..Q20
3UG45 12
320 … 500
420 … 690
160 … 690
-2/8
--
--2/8
2/2.5
2/3.5
2/4
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 16
3UG46 17
3UG46 18
7
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us
V
160 … 260
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Rated output, typical
• At 230 V AC
• At 400 V AC
• At 460 V AC
W/VA
W/VA
W/VA
2/4
---
Width
mm
22.5
RESET
--
Function principle
Closed-circuit
Availability time after application of Us
ms
200
Response time on occurrence of a fault
ms
300
Adjustable tripping delay time
s
--
Adjustable ON-delay time
s
--
Mains buffering time, typical
ms
10
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
V
690
Rated impulse withstand voltage
kV
6
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
-25 … +60
-40 … +85
automatic/manual
Closed-circuit, opencircuit (3UG46 17/
3UG46 18: closed-circuit)
1000
0.1 ... 20
0.1 … 20
EMC tests1)
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500, 20 m/s2
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms
15/11
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 … 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Measuring range
V
160 ... 260
Setting range
V
Measuring accuracy
%
--
±5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters
%
--
±1
--
–10 %
referred to
upper limit
of effective
range
Conductor cross-section
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
• Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228
- Finely stranded
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
--
30
Measuring circuits
Setting accuracy
320 ... 500
420 ... 690
160 ... 690
200...690
--
Accuracy of digital display
%/°C
--
±0.1
Hysteresis for voltage
V
--
5 % of
upper limit
of effective
range
Hysteresis for unbalance
%
--
Deviation for frequency fluctuation
%
--
7/66
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
–1 V
±1 digit
Deviations for temperature deviations
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce
suitable measures.
160...690
1 ... 20 V
2 % of limit
value
±1 %
2 % of limit
value for
3UG46 17/
3UG46 18
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
k
3UG45 11..N20
3UG45 11..P20
3UG45 11..Q20
3UG45 12
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 16
3UG46 17
3UG46 18
Control circuits
Load capacity of the output relay
• Thermal current limit Ith
A
5
Rated operational current Ie at
• AC-15/230 V/400 V
• DC-13/24 V
• DC-13/110 V
• DC-13/230 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC
mA
5
Output relay with DIAZED fuse
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance AC-15
Million 0.1
operating
cycles
Mechanical endurance
Million 10
operating
cycles
■ Dimensional drawings
5
86
A
B
C
74
62
90
62
82
110
36
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
7
15
22,5
A
B
C
3UG45 11-.A
3UG45 12-.A
3UG45 11-.B
3UG45 12-.B
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
3UG46 16
3UG46 18
Spring-loaded
terminal
84
94
103
Screw-type
connection
83
92
102
Type
Removable terminal
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/67
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
■ Schematics
3UG45 11-.A
3UG45 12-.A
3UG46 16
3UG46 18
3UG45 11-.B
3UG45 12-.B
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
L 1
L 2
L 3
L 1
L 2
L 3
N
L 1
L 2
L 3
L 1
L 2
L 3
1 1
L 1
3 U G 4
L 2
L 3
2 1
1 1
N
3 U G 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 7 a
1 2
1 4
L 1 L 2
L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 6 a
1 2
1 4
2 2
2 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 8 a
1 2
Position of the connection terminals
1 4
L 1
7/68
L 2
1 2
1 1
1 4
2 2
2 1
2 4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
N
L 3
L 1
L 2
L 3
1 2
1 1
1 4
2 2
2 1
2 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 0
1 1
L 3
7
1 2
L 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 8
L 1
3UG46 16
3UG46 18
3UG45 11-.B
3UG45 12-.B
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 9
3UG45 11-.A
3UG45 12-.A
2 1
1 1
3 U G 4
1 4
2 2
2 4
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Voltage monitoring
■ Overview
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC voltages against the
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. The products differ
with regard to their power supply (internal or external).
■ Function
Undervoltage
The 3UG46 33 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power
supply and performs overshoot, undershoot or window
monitoring of the voltage depending on how it is parameterized.
The device is equipped with a display and is parameterized
using three buttons.
The operating and measuring range extends from 17 V to 275 V
AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be
freely configured within this range. If one of these threshold
values is reached, the output relay responds according to the
set principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time has
elapsed. This delay time UDel can be set from 0.1 to 20 s like the
ON-delay time onDel.
A1-A2 =
<
Hysteresis
=0
NSB0_01585
3UG46 33 monitoring relays
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Window monitoring
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 150 V. The device can be
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit
principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output
changeover contact is available as signaling contact.
A1-A2 =
>
<
Hysteresis
With the closed-circuit principle selected
Hysteresis
Overvoltage
11/14
A1-A2 =
>
11/12
7
NSB0_01586
=0
onDelay
Hysteresis
NSB0_01584
=0
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/69
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Voltage monitoring
The 3UG46 31/3UG46 32 voltage monitoring relay is supplied
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of
the voltage depending on how it is parameterized. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three
buttons.
The measuring range extends from 0.1 V to 60 V or from
10 to 600 V AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or
undershoot can be freely configured within this range. If one of
these threshold values is reached, the output relay responds
according to the set principle of operation as soon as the delay
time has elapsed. This delay time UDel can be set from 0.1 to
20 s.
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 30 V or 0.1 to 300 V. The
device can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or
closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. One
output changeover contact is available as signaling contact.
Undervoltage
A1-A2
<
Hysteresis
=0
NSB0_01582
3UG46 31/3UG46 32 monitoring relays
11/14
11/12
Delay
Window monitoring
A1-A2
With the closed-circuit principle selected
>
<
Overvoltage
Hysteresis
A1-A2
Hysteresis
NSB0_01583
=0
>
11/14
Hysteresis
NSB0_01581
=0
11/14
11/12
7
Delay
7/70
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
11/12
Delay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Voltage monitoring
■ Technical specifications
3UG46 31.AA
3UG46 31.AW
3UG46 32.AA
3UG46 32.AW
3UG46 33
V
24
AC/DC
24 ... 240
AC/DC
24
AC/DC
24 ... 240
AC/DC
17 ... 275
AC/DC
Rated frequency for AC
Hz
50/60
Operating range
V
20.4 ... 27.6
20.4 ... 275
20.4 ... 27.6
20.4 ... 275
Rated output
VA
2/4
Width
mm
22.5
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us
40 ... 500
17 ... 275
Automatic/manual
RESET
Availability time after application of Us
ms
1000
Response time on occurrence of a fault
ms
300
Adjustable tripping delay time
s
0.1 … 20
Adjustable ON-delay time
s
--
Mains buffering time, typical
ms
10
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
V
300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
-25 … +60
-40 … +85
0.1 ... 20
--
690
300
6
4
EMC tests1)
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm
1-6/1S; 6-500, 20 m/s2
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms
15/11
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 … 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Permissible measuring range single-phase AC/DC voltage
V
0.1 ... 90
10 ... 650
17 ... 275
Setting range single-phase voltage
V
0.1 ... 60
10 ... 600
17 ... 275
Measuring frequency
Hz
40 ... 500
Measuring accuracy
%
5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters
%
1
Conductor cross-section
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
• Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228
- Finely stranded
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
40 ... 500
–1 digit
Accuracy of digital display
Deviations for temperature fluctuations
%/°C
–1
Hysteresis for single-phase voltage
V
0.1 ... 30
Load capacity of the output relay
• Thermal current limit Ith
A
5
Rated operational current Ie at
• AC-15 230/400 V
• DC-13 24 V
• DC-13 110 V
• DC-13 230 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC
mA
5
Output relay with DIAZED fuse
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance AC-15
Million
0.1
operating
cycles
Endurance with contactor relay
10
Million
operating
cycles
0.1 ... 300
0.1 ... 150
Control circuits
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce
suitable measures.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/71
7
Measuring circuits
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Voltage monitoring
■ Dimensional drawings
5
86
A
B
C
74
62
90
62
82
110
36
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
15
22,5
B
3UG46 31
3UG46 32
3UG46 33
Type
Removable terminals
Spring-loaded terminal
94
Screw-type connection
92
■ Schematics
3UG46 31
3UG46 32
3UG46 31-.AW30
3UG46 32-.AW30
3UG46 33
A C /D C
AC/DC
A C /D C
IN (+ )
A 1 (+ )
< U
1 1
A1(+)
IN(+)
A 2 (+ )
< U
M (-)
1 2
1 4
<U>
A2(–)
12
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 3 a
7
NSB0_01614
Position of the connection terminals
3UG46 31
3UG46 32
1 2
1 1
M
A 2
7/72
1 4
A 1
A 2
1 2
1 1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
1 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 3
IN
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 2
A 1
3UG46 33
>
M (-)
14
M(–)
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 2 a
1 1
IN (+ )
11
>
1 2
1 4
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Current monitoring
■ Overview
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC currents against the
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. They differ with
regard to their measuring ranges and supply voltage types.
■ Function
3UG46 21/3UG46 22 monitoring relays
The measuring range extends from 3 to 500 mA or 0.05 to 10 A.
The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be freely
configured within this range. If one of these threshold values is
reached, the output relay responds according to the set
principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time IDel has
elapsed. This time and the ON-delay time onDel are adjustable
from 0.1 to 20 s.
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 250 mA or 0.01 to 5 A.
The device can be operated on the basis of either the opencircuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET.
One output changeover contact is available as signaling
contact.
Current undershoot
A1-A2
<
Hysteresis
=0
NSB0_01580
The 3UG46 21/3UG46 22 current monitoring relay is supplied
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of
the current depending on how it is parameterized. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three
buttons.
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Window monitoring
With the closed-circuit principle selected
A1-A2
7
Current overshoot
A1-A2
>
<
>
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
=0
=0
NSB0_01626
Hysteresis
NSB0_01579
11/14
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/73
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Current monitoring
■ Technical specifications
3UG46 21-.AA
3UG46 21-.AW
3UG46 22-.AA
3UG46 22-.AW
24 … 240
24
24 … 240
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us
V
24
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Operating range
V
20.4 ... 26.4
Rated power
VA
2/4
Width
mm
22.5
Automatic/manual
RESET
Availability time after application of Us
ms
1000
Response time on occurrence of a fault
ms
300
Adjustable tripping delay time
s
0.1 … 20
Adjustable ON-delay time
s
0.1 … 20
Mains buffering time, typical
ms
10
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
V
300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
-25 … +60
-40 … +85
EMC tests
1)
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500.20 m/s2
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms
15/11
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 … 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Measuring range for single-phase AC/DC current
A
0.003 ... 0.6
0.05 ... 15
Setting range for single-phase current
A
0.003 ... 0.5
0.05 ... 10
Measuring accuracy
%
5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters
%
1
Conductor cross-section
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
• Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228
- Finely stranded
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
7
Measuring circuit
– 1 digit
Accuracy of digital display
Deviations for temperature fluctuations
%/°C
Hysteresis for single-phase current
– 0.1
0.1 ... 250 mA
Control circuit
Load capacity of the output relay
• Thermal current limit Ith
A
5
Rated operational current Ie at
• AC-15 230/ 400 V
• DC-13 24 V
• DC-13 110 V
• DC-13 230 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC
mA
5
Output relay for DIAZED fuse
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance AC-15
Million 0.1
operating
cycles
Endurance with contactor relay
Million 10
operating
cycles
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce
suitable measures.
7/74
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
0.01 ... 5 A
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Current monitoring
■ Dimensional drawings
5
86
A
B
C
74
62
90
62
82
110
36
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
15
22,5
B
3UG46 21
3UG46 22
Type
Removable terminals
Spring-loaded terminal
94
Screw-type terminal
92
■ Schematics
3UG46 21-.AA30
3UG46 22-.AA30
AC/DC
3UG46 21-.AW30
3UG46 22-.AW30
U Load
AC/DC
U Load
Load
A1(+)
IN(+)
Load
11
A1(+)
IN(+)
11
< >
12
A2(–)
M(–)
NSB0_01534a
14
< >
A2(–)
12
14
M(–)
7
NSB0_01535a
Position of the connection terminals
3UG46 21
3UG46 22
IN
1 2
1 1
M
A 2
1 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 1
A 1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/75
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG30 14 power factor monitoring device enables the load
monitoring of motors.
■ Function
The 3UG30 14 monitoring relay is used for monitoring the load of
motors by measuring the phase angle between voltage and
current, i.e. the power factor. The output relays respond as long
as the power factor lies between the upper and lower thresholds.
These are set separately on the front using two potentiometers.
Note:
Power factor monitoring relays are connected in series after the
motor contactor to ensure that the delay time for bridging startup elapses after switch-on. For this reason, the output relay must
not be connected in series with the supply voltage of the motor
contactor, otherwise it would not be possible to switch on the
load feeder. The minimum current must be at least 0.2 A.
When the value of the power factor lies outside this range, the
corresponding output relay will drop after a delay time T1, that
can be set on the front, has elapsed. A fixed hysteresis prevents
the output relay from continuously switching on and off when the
measured value is close to the threshold.
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 9
1
2
The ON-delay T2 can be used to suppress the effects of motor
start-up.
2
3
c o s
T 2
4
Important
T 1
T 1
5
It is important to ensure that the phases are connected in the
correct sequence L1-L2-L3, otherwise the power factor will be
evaluated incorrectly.
T h r e s h o ld v a
H y s te r e s is
T h r e s h o ld v a
O u tp u t r e la y
( te r m in a ls 2 1
O u tp u t r e la y
( te r m in a ls 1 1
1
2
3
4
5
lu e
m a x
lu e
m in
c o s
> c o s
, 2 2 , 2 4 )
c o s
< c o s
, 1 2 , 1 4 )
m a x
m in
■ Technical specifications
Type
3UG30/3UG35
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15/230 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/48 V
DC-13/60 V
DC-13/110 V
DC-13/230 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8
3
1
0.45
0.35
0.2
0.1
mA
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay with DIAZED fuse1)
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance
Operating cycles
1 x 105
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
2 x 106
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
°C
°C
-20 ... + 50
-30 ... + 70
Connection of conductors
Solid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves
mm²
mm²
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection
Terminals
Enclosures
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Load capacity of the output relay
7
Minimum contact load
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to DIN VDE 0660,
Part 200.
7/76
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
IP20
IP40
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor monitoring
Rated control supply voltage Us
V
see Catalog LV 1 (L1/L2 also used to supply units)
Voltage tolerance
V
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Maximum power consumption
VA
3
Frequency of the monitored line
Hz
50 ... 60
0.1 ... 0.99 for lower and upper threshold
Setting range of power factor
Hysteresis fixed
%
Setting accuracy
%
–10 referred to upper limit of effective range
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters
%
–0.8
Deviations for temperature fluctuations
%
–0.05/K
s
s
0.5 ... 20; –20 %
0.3 ... 3; –20 %
10 for power factor 0.4
10 ... 30 for power factor 0.4
T2, ON-delay
T1 after reaching the threshold
Delay time
Input circuit current range
A
0.5 ... 10
Input circuit peak current (< 1 s)
A
50
Input circuit input resistor L1/L2/L3
kW
2
Input circuit input resistor current IN1
W
0.02
Currents > 10 A only with current transformer.
■ Dimensional drawings
45
77
100
NSB00982
57
79
90
100
3UG30 14
■ Schematics
3UG30 14
Three-phase operation, I < 10 A~
L1
L2
L3
M
L1 L2 L3 IN1
< p. f.
11 > p. f. 21
NSB01130b
12
7
> p. f. <
14 22 24
3UG30 14
Three-phase operation, I > 10 A~
L1
L2
L3
M
K(P1 ) L(P2 )
k(S 1) l(S 2)
external current
L1 L2 L3 IN1 transformer
< p. f. 11 > p. f. 21
> p. f. <
12
NSB0_01131c
14 22 24
3UG30 14
Single-phase operation, 230 V~
L
N
Load
L1 L2 L3 IN1
< p. f.
11 > p. f. 21
> p. f. <
NSB01132b
12
14 22 24
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/77
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded AC networks
■ Overview
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between the
ungrounded single or three-phase AC supply and a protective
ground conductor:
• Measuring principle with superimposed DC voltage
• Two selectable measuring ranges of 1 ... 110 kW
• Stepless setting within the measuring range
• Selectable:
- Auto reset function with fixed hysteresis or
- Storage of the tripping operation
• Test function with test button and terminal connections on the
front
• Switching output: 1 CO contact
• Insulation fault indication with a red LED
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and
EN 61000-6-2.
■ Function
The monitoring relay measures the insulation resistance
between the ungrounded AC supply and an associated
protective ground conductor.
A superposed DC measuring voltage is used to perform the
measurement.
The monitoring relay is divided into two ranges for an insulation
resistance range from 1 to 100 kW. A range switch on the front
can be used to switch over between a 1 to 11 kW range and a
10 to 110 kW range. Within the selected range, the monitoring
relay can be steplessly adapted to the respective insulation
conditions.
Note:
The monitoring relay is designed for AC supply systems.
Series-connected rectifiers must be galvanically isolated from
the measuring relay that is to be monitored.
If the insulation resistance exceeds 1.6 times (corresponding to
60 % hysteresis) the set threshold, the output relay will return to
the rest position.
Test functions
The "Test" button on the front can be used to simulate a ground
fault. If the "Test" button is pressed for at least 300 ms, the output
relay is energized and the fault LED lights up. An external test
button can be connected to terminal Y1. The function is
activated by closing (> 300 ms).
7
Fault storage and RESET
If terminals Y1 and Y2 are jumpered, the monitoring relay is set
to fault storage mode. If the set insulation resistance is undershot, the output relay is excited and remains tripped even after
the insulation resistance rises above 1.6 times the set value
again. Fault storage can be reset by briefly pressing the RESET
button, briefly jumpering (< 300 ms) the Y1 and PE/ground
terminals or by switching off and on the supply voltage.
7/78
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
1
3 Y1/PE
2
4
If the insulation resistance undershoots the set threshold, the
output relay is excited and the red LED (fault display) is lit.
NSB0_01393
1 A1/A2
A1/B2
2 Y1/Y2
1.6 x R value
R
R value
3
4
5 11/14
11/12
Test
5
Test
= Supply voltage
A1-B2/A1-A2 for
115 V/230 V AC
A1-A2 for 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
= Remote connectionsave-reset
= Key on the front test/reset
= Insulation resistance R
of network
Set operating value R
= NO contact
= > approx. 300 ms
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded AC networks
■ Technical specifications
3UG3 081
Control circuits
-15 % ... +10 %
Operating range of the control supply voltage
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
VA/W
8/2
110 ... 130 V AC
VA
3
220 ... 240 V AC
VA
3
Hz
50 ... 60
• Operating value
• Minimum internal resistance for AC
k
k
1 ... 110
100
• Minimum internal resistance for DC
k
100
• DC measurement voltage
V
30 DC
• Insulation voltage
V
415 AC
Rated power
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage
Measurement circuits L/PE/ground
Y1-Y2
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m)
• Delay time in case of response
s
1
1 CO contact,
open-circuit principle
Output relay
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui
between supply, measurement,
and output circuit
Overvoltage category
acc. to IEC 664
Degree of pollution
acc. to IEC 664
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp
acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
Shock resistance
acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
V
III
3
kV
4
IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals
°C
°C
10
-25 ... 65
-40 ... 85
Any
Permissible mounting position
Conductor cross-section
400 acc. to IEC 60947-1
Solid
mm2
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve
mm2
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
77
100
7
NSB00982
45
57
79
90
100
■ Dimensional drawings
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/79
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded DC networks
■ Overview
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between
ungrounded pure DC networks and a protective-ground
conductor:
• Measuring principle for differential current measurement
• Response threshold can be set continuously from
10 to 110 kW
• Selectable
- Auto reset function with hysteresis or
- Storage of the tripping operation
• Front selector switch for open-circuit and closed-circuit
principle for the output relay
• Test function with test buttons on the front for L+ and Land over terminal connections
• Switching output: 1 CO contact
• Insulation fault indicator for L+ and L- through two red LEDs
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and
EN 61000-6-2
■ Function
The monitoring relay measures the insulation voltage between
the positive and negative supply voltage in an ungrounded DC
network and a corresponding protective conductor.
The measurement is based on the DC residual current
measurement principle. The response value can be adjusted
steplessly in the range from 10 to 110 kW and thus can be
adapted to the corresponding conditions. If the insulation
resistance falls below the set response value, the output relay
triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed-circuit
principle selector switch) and a fault LED lights up.
A ground fault is evaluated separately for L+ and L- and
indicated by means of a corresponding LED.
Note:
Open/closed-circuit principle selector switch
The function principle of the output relay can be adjusted by
means of a selector switch on the front panel.
If the relay is to respond in the event of a fault (contact symbol
open), the open-circuit principle must be selected. If the relay
however is to trigger in the event of a fault (contact symbol
closed), the closed-circuit principle must be selected.
Note:
The position of the selector switch has no effect upon the fault
LEDs. The LEDs always light up if the insulation resistance on L+
or L– falls below the set value.
Due to the measurement principle, a symmetrical ground fault on
terminals L+ and L- cannot be evaluated.
1
4
5
Test function
An external test button can be connected to terminals Y1-Y3 for
L+ and terminals Y4-Y3 for L-. The function is triggered by
means of a NO contact.
2
1
Y 3 /Y 4
Y 1 /Y 3
Y 2 /Y 3
3
A ground fault can be simulated using the Test L+ and Test Lbuttons on the front. If the test button is pressed for at least 1 s,
the status of the output relay changes and the corresponding
fault LED lights up.
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 9 5
A 1 /A 2
2
3
L + /P E R
L -/P E
6
8
7
O p e n c ir c u it /
c lo s e d c ir c u it
p r in c ip le
R H y s t
R v a lu e
4
5
1 1 /1 4
1 1 /1 2
6
R
T e s t >
T e s t
H y s t
= a p p ro x . 1 s
= ty p ic a lly 2 x R
s
7
x
7
8
Fault storage and RESET
If terminals Y2 and Y3 are linked, the monitoring relay is set to
fault storage mode.
If the insulation resistance falls below the set value, the output
relay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed
circuit selector switch), and stays in this state even if the
insulation resistance rises again above the hysteresis value
(typical: 2 times the set value). This fault storage can be deleted
by pressing and releasing the L+ RESET button, opening the
Y2-Y3 connection or by switching off the supply voltage.
7/80
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
= S u p p ly v o lta g e
= B u tto n o n fro n t R e s e t L + a n d L - /
T e s t L +
= B u tto n o n fro n t - T e s t
T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio
T e s t L = T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio
T e s t L +
= T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio
S to re , re s e t
= In s u la tio n r e s is ta n c e R
o f s u p p ly
s e t r e s p o n s e v a lu e R
= S w itc h o n fr o n t
O p e n - c ir c u it /
c lo s e d - c ir c u it p r in c ip le
= N O c o n ta c t
L n n n -
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded DC networks
■ Technical specifications
3UG30 82
Control circuits
-15 % ... +10 %
Operating range of the control supply voltage
24 ... 240 V AC
Rated power
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage
VA/W
8/2
Hz
50 ... 60
Measuring circuits
• Operating value
k
10 ... 110
• Minimum internal resistance for DC
k
57
• Measurement DC voltage
V
24 ... 240
• Max. DC insulation voltage (L+/PE/ground, L-/PE/ground)
V DC
300
Y1/Y3, Y4/Y3
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m)
• Delay time in case of response
s
1
1 changeover contact, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
Output relay
General data
between supply, measurement,
and output circuit
acc. to IEC 664
acc. to IEC 664
V
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp
acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303
V
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
Shock resistance
acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Insulation resistance
Overvoltage category
Degree of pollution
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
III
3
4000
IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals
°C
°C
10
-25 ... + 65
-40 ... + 85
any
Permissible mounting position
Conductor cross-section
400
Solid
mm2
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve
mm2
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
7
77
100
NSB00982
45
57
79
90
100
■ Dimensional drawings
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/81
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Level monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG35 01 level monitoring relay is used together with the
2- or 3-pole sensors to monitor the levels of conductive liquids.
■ Function
The principle of operation is based on measuring the electrical
resistance of the liquid between two immersion sensors and a
reference terminal. If the measured value is lower than the
sensitivity set at the front, the output relay changes its switching
state. In order to exclude electrolytic phenomena in the liquid,
the sensors are supplied with alternating current.
Note:
It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min
and Max terminals in the range 5 to 100 kW, e.g. photoresistors,
temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance etc.
The monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other
applications apart from monitoring the levels of liquids.
Two-level control: the output relay changes its switching state as
soon as the liquid level reaches the maximum sensor, while the
minimum sensor is submerged. The relay returns to its original
switching state as soon as the minimum sensor no longer has
contact with the liquid.
A 1 /A 2
2
The delay times T1 and T2 of the output relay have not been
included in the diagram in order to enhance clarity.
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
7
1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
3
1
For safe resetting, the supply voltage must be interrupted for
at least 0.5 s (T3).
7/82
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 1
T 3
M a x im u m le v e l 1)
M in im u m le v e l 1)
M o n ito r e d le v e l
O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n O V E R
O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n U N D E R
) D e te r m in e d b y th e a r r a n g e m e n t
o f th e p r o b e s in th e m o n ito r e d liq u id .
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Level monitoring
■ Technical specifications
Type
3UG30/3UG35
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15/230 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/48 V
DC-13/60 V
DC-13/110 V
DC-13/230 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8
3
1
0.45
0.35
0.2
0.1
mA
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay with DIAZED fuse1)
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance
Operating cycles
1 x 105
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
2 x 106
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
°C
°C
-20 ... + 50
-30 ... + 70
Connection of conductors
Solid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves
mm²
mm²
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection
Terminals
Enclosures
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Load capacity of the output relay
Minimum contact load
IP20
IP40
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
V
Rated control supply voltage Us
see Catalog LV 1 (electrical isolation by means of a transformer)
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Voltage tolerance
W/VA
Maximum power consumption
3/6
UNDER/OVER selector switch at the front
Function
Inlet or outlet monitoring
Sensitivity
Adjustable
kW
5 ... 100
Setting accuracy
at maximum sensitivity
%
–30
Repeat accuracy
at constant parameters
%
–0.1
Sensor length
max.
m
100
Electrode voltage
max.
V
24 (50/60 Hz)
Electrode current
max.
mA
1 (50/60 Hz)
Conductor capacity
of the sensor cable1)
nF
10
Delay time
• T1 at Max/M terminal
• T2 at Min/M terminal
ms
ms
Typical 500 (ON-delay with OVER, OFF-delay with UNDER)
Typical 300 (OFF-delay with OVER, ON-delay with UNDER)
Mains buffering time
ms
300
7
1) The sensor cable does not necessarily have to be shielded, but it is not
recommended to lay this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also
possible to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected
to the M terminal.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/83
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Level monitoring
■ Dimensional drawings
22,5
77
100
NSB00983
57
79
90
100
3UG35 01
Level monitoring sensors
3UG32 07-3A
three-pole wire electrode
3UG32 07-1B
single-pole bow electrode
0,5
NSB00991a
SW 22
SW 22
15
15
6±1
NSB00994
15 15
7±1
5
500
3UG32 07-1C
single-pole electrode, rugged design
SW 22
SW 22
SW 22
NSB00993a
0,5
5
7
5
500
15
15
NSB00995
3UG32 07-2B
two-pole bow electrode
15 15
7±1
6±1
■ Schematics
3UG35 01
AC
A1 M
Min Max
11
R ><
A2
12
14
NSB00970
7/84
50
PTFEinsulation
40
NSB00992
15
15
3UG32 07-2A
two-pole wire electrode
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Speed monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG30 51 monitoring relay is used together with a sensor to
monitor drives for underspeeding.
■ Function
The underspeed monitoring relay operates according to the
principle of retriggerable OFF-delay. During the time (value) set
on the front panel, another pulse must arrive at input IN1 or IN2
to ensure that the output relay remains picked up. The
monitoring relay evaluates the rising edge of the signal, i.e.
a continuous signal is also recognized as a missing pulse. If the
retrigger pulse does not arrive, indicating a reduction in speed,
the output relay drops. In order to be able to start a drive, the
output relay remains picked up during the ON-delay time T, even
if the speed is still below the set value (motor starting override
time). The first pulse must come within this time.
Speed monitoring with memory (MEMORY)
When the output relay drops, this state remains stored even
when the speed reaches a permissible value again. The stored
state can be ended by a control signal at the reset terminal or by
interrupting the supply voltage for at least 200 ms.
A 1 /A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 6
1
5
2
3
2
3
1
4
T
The monitoring relay can be used for all functions where a
continuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (belt travel
monitoring, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring,
clock-time monitoring).
T
4
6
5
6
S e t v a lu e
H y s te r e s is
A c tu a l v a lu e
O u tp u t r e la y
R e s e t
S to ra g e (M E M O R Y )
6
Speed monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY)
When the speed of the drive drops below the set value, the
output relay drops. It picks up again when the speed is greater
than the set value plus the fixed hysteresis.
A 1 /A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 5
3
2
1
2
1
3
4
T
S e t v a lu e
H y s te r e s is
A c tu a l v a lu e
O u tp u t r e la y
4
■ Technical specifications
3UG30/3UG35
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15/230 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/48 V
DC-13/60 V
DC-13/110 V
DC-13/230 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8
3
1
0.45
0.35
0.2
0.1
mA
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay with DIAZED fuse1)
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance
Operating cycles
1 x 105
Mechanical endurance
Operating cycles
2 x 106
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
°C
°C
-20 ... + 50
-30 ... + 70
Connection of conductors
Solid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves
mm²
mm²
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection
Terminals
Enclosures
Vibration resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Minimum contact load
7
Type
Load capacity of the output relay
IP20
IP40
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/85
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Speed monitoring
Type
3UG30 51
V
Rated control supply voltage Us
See Catalog LV 1 (for AC voltages with electrical isolation by means of
transformer, 24 V DC without electrical isolation)
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Voltage tolerance
Maximum power consumption
W/VA
4/5
Set value
%
Adjustable to 10 ... 100 of the selected time setting range
Hysteresis
%
Typical 5 of the set value
Setting accuracy
%
10 referred to upper limit of time setting range
Repeat accuracy
at constant parameters
%
–0.5
Deviations
with temperature fluctuations
%/°C
0.1
s
Adjustable to 0.3 ... 30 –10 %
V
Max. voltage 30, 3-wire sensor, pnp operation
ON-delay T
Signal input IN11)
(Input resistance 16 k)
Signal input IN21)
(Input resistance 1 k)
Voltage level for reliable operation
Level 1
Level 0
V
V
4.5 ... 30
0 up to 1
Sensor supply
+24 V/0 V
+8 V2
mA
mA
max. 50 at 24 V (20 ... 35 V) DC
1 DC 8.2 V
- Frequency
- Revolutions
Hz
min-1
10 ... 1
600 ... 60
- Frequency
- Revolutions
Hz
min-1
1 ... 0.1
60 ... 6
- Frequency
- Revolutions
Hz
min-1
0.17 ... 0.017
10 ... 1
Floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor
Measuring range,
selectable (rotary switch on front)
Time setting range
• 0.1 ... 1 s
• 1 ... 10 s
• 0.1 ... 1 min
• 1 ... 10 min
-
Frequency
Hz
Revolutions
min-1
Minimum pulse duration of signal ms
Minimum interval between 2 pulses
Rotary switch on front panel
with or without memory
Function mode setting
0.017 ... 0.0017
1 ... 0.1
5
5
Availability time after application of Us
ms
200
Mains buffering time
ms
10
1) The sensors are not included in the scope of supply.
45
77
100
■ Schematics
+
AC/
DC
U
-
PNP
+ A1 +24 V
RES IN1
0V
11
n < Value
_
A2
NSB00976c
7/86
IN2
+ 8V2
12
14
+ NAMUR
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
NSB00982
57
79
90
100
7
■ Dimensional drawings
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
■ Overview
The 3RS10 and 3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.
The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium,
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or
undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window
function).
Temperature
setting
LED for display
LED "Device on voltage"
"Up and Down" keys
The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two
threshold values, digital units to DIN 3440, which are also a good
alternative to temperature controls for the low-end range, and
digital units for up to 3 sensors which have been optimized for
monitoring large motors.
LED "Relay switched"
Rotary switch for
parameter selection
Hysteresis switch
NSB0_01421
■ Design
The temperature monitoring relays comply with:
• IEC 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"
• IEC 60947-5-1; VDE 0660 "Low-voltage controlgear,
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"
• EN 61000-6-4 "Basic technical standard for emitted
interference (Industry)"
• EN 61000-6-2 "Basic technical standard for interference
immunity (Industry)"
• EN 50042 "Designations for terminals"
• UL/CSA
• DIN 3440 (3RS10 40, 3RS11 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 42).
Temperature drift depending on the length and cross-section of
the leads with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of
20 °C, in K:
Cable length
m
Cross-section
mm²
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
10
1.8
1.2
0.9
0.6
25
4.5
3.0
2.3
1.5
50
9.0
6.0
4.5
3.0
75
13.6
9.0
6.8
4.5
Connection of resistance-type thermometers
100
18.1
12.1
9.0
6.0
2-wire measurement
200
36.3
24.2
18.1
12.1
500
91.6
60.8
45.5
30.2
I
T3
T2
3-wire measurement
To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit
is often used. Using the additional wire, two measuring circuits
can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal
evaluator can then automatically calculate the line resistance
and take it into account.
I
PT 100
T1
T3
T2
7
When 2-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of
the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error
must be taken into account when the signal evaluator is
calibrated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2
and T3 for this purpose.
PT 100
NSB01323a
I
Wiring errors
T1
NSB01324a
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise
approximately 2.5 K/W. If the resistance of the wiring is not known
and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be
estimated using the following table.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/87
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
Connection of thermocouples
Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature
measurement will be performed between the measuring point
and the signal evaluator.
This principle assumes that the signal evaluator knows the
temperature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the
3RS11 temperature monitoring relay has an integral compensator that determines this comparison temperature and builds it
into the result of the measurement. Therefore, the thermal
sensors and cables must be insulated.
The absolute temperature is calculated from the ambient
temperature of the signal evaluator and the temperature
difference measured by the thermocouple.
Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing
to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point
at the signal evaluator (T2).
The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using
connecting leads that are made from the same material as the
thermocouple. If a different type of conductor is used, an error
will result in the measurement.
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The time
delay can only be adjusted with digital units (on analog units,
t = 0).
The relays return to their original state as soon as the
temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
Temperature overshoot
Closed-circuit principle
T 2
NSB01327c
J1
J2
Us
K1
K2
N iC r
T 1
■ Function
t
t
t
Temperature undershoot
Closed-circuit principle
M e a s u r in g p o in t
N i
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 2 5 a
In te rn a l
r e fe r e n c e p o in t c o m p e n s a tio n
NSB01329b
J1
J2
Us
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html
http://www.ephy-mess.de
or from
7
EPHY-MESS GmbH (see Appendix, External Partners)
7/88
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
K1
K2
t
t
t
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold J1, the
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time t
has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as soon as the
temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
K2 responds in the same manner to the lower threshold of J2.
Closed-circuit principle
For thermocouples
80
Type "E"
70
Type "J"
60
Type "K"
50
Type "N"
40
NSB01331c
J1
■ Characteristic curves
Voltage in mV
Window monitoring (digital units only)
30
Type "T"
NSB0_01321a
20
J2
10
Us
0
K1
t
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200 1400 1600
Temperature in °C
t
K2
t
Resistance in Ohm
For resistance sensors
5000
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The
relays only return to the original state when the temperature falls
below the set hysteresis value and when terminals Y3 and Y4
have been briefly jumpered.
4000
3000
KTY83
KTY84
PT1000
2000
1000
0
-100
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 2 d
J 1
NTC
PT100
0
100
200
300
NSB0_01322
Principle of operation with memory function (3RS10 42,
3RS11 42), based on the example of temperature
undershoot using the closed-circuit principle
400
500
Temperature in °C
J 2
U s
Y 3 -Y 4
K 1
t
t
t
7
K 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/89
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, analog adjustable
■ Overview
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or
undershoot. When the threshold values are reached, the output
relay switches on or off depending on the setting.
The 3RS10/3RS11 analog temperature monitoring relays can be
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.
The temperature is sensed by the sensors in the medium,
■ Technical specifications
Type
3RS10 00
3RS10 10
3RS11 00
3RS11 01
3RS10 20
TC type J
TC type K
PT100
3RS10 30
3RS11 20
3RS11 21
TC type J
TC type K
General data
PT100
Sensor type
mm
Width
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Operating range
W/VA
Rated power
22.5
< 2/4
Auxiliary circuits
1 NO + 1 NC
Contacts
Rated operational currents Ie
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC
- 240 V AC
A
3
A
A
1
0.1
DIAZED fuse
• gl/Gg operational class
Short-circuit current (at 250 V)
A
kA
4
1
Electrical endurance
AC-15 at 3 A
100000
Mechanical endurance
Mechanical operating cycles
3 x 106
1 CO + 1 NO
Tripping units
• Measuring accuracy
at 20 °C ambient temperature
(T20)
Typical < ±5 % from upper limit of scale
• Reference point accuracy
--
< –5 K
--
< –5 K
• Deviations due to ambient temperature
in % from measuring range
<2
<3
<2
<3
---
Typical 1
Typical 0.2
---
--
Yes
--
• Hysteresis settings
- For temperature 1
- For temperature 2
2 ... 20 % from upper limit of scale
5 % from upper limit of scale
Sensor circuits
7
• Typical sensor circuits
- PT100
- PT1000
mA
mA
Typical 1
Typical 0.2
• Open-circuit detection
No
• Short-circuit detection
No
• 3-wire conductor connection1)
Yes
Enclosures
Environmental influences
Permissible ambient temperature
Permissible storage temperature
Permissible mounting position
°C
°C
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(pollution degree 3)
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +80
any
V
300
Conductor cross-section
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 ... 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
8WA2 807
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 68-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75
Shock resistance to IEC 68-2-27
g/ms
15/11
1) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.
7/90
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, analog adjustable
■ Dimensional drawings
5
86
36
Type
A
B
C
3RS10 00
3RS10 10
3RS11 0
3RS11 1
3RS1 .2
3RS1 .3
80
90
100
A
B
C
74
62
90
62
82
110
Standard terminal
Screw-type
terminal
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded
terminal
84
94
103
Screw-type
terminal
83
92
102
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
15
22,5
■ Schematics
Connection examples
3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
3RS10 00, 3RS10 10
A1
A1 A3
K1
T1
T2
11
13
1
T14
12
T3
K1
K2
T+
11
14
12
23
2
24
A2
NSB0_01336b
A2
NSB0_01333b
General equipment designation
A1 = 24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
3RS11 00, 3RS11 01
A3 = 110 V AC
K1
T-
11
13
K1, K2, K3 output relay
14
12
T+
A2 = M
7
A1 A3
Equipment designation for 3RS10 00, 3RS10 10, 3RS11 00,
3RS11 01, 3RS10 20, 3RS10 30, 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
= LED: "Device connected to supply"
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
A2
NSB0_01334b
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
3RS10 20, 3RS10 30
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples
A1
K1
11
T1
1
T2
K2
T3
14
12
23
Caution!
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
2
24
A2
NSB0_01335b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/91
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440
■ Overview
The 3RS10/3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be used
for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for
staying within an operating range (window function).
The 3RS10 40, 3RS20 40, 3RS11 40 and 3RS21 40 relays
comply with the requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature
monitors; the 3RS10 42 and 3RS11 42 relays comply with the
requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature limiters. The relays are
also an excellent alternative to temperature controls in the lowend performance range (2 or 3-point closed-loop control).
■ Technical specifications
Type
3RS10 40/3RS10 42/3RS20 40
3RS11 40/3RS21 40
3RS11 42
< –2 K, –1 digit
< –5 K, –1 digit
< –7 K, –1 digit
--
< –5 K
General data
Width
mm
45
Operating range
V
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Rated power
W/VA
< 4/7
Auxiliary circuits
1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
Contacts
Rated operational currents Ie
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC
- 240 V AC
A
3
A
A
1
0.1
DIAZED fuse
gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance
AC-15 at 3 A
A
100000
30 x 106
Mechanical endurance
Mechanical operating cycles
Tripping units
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature
(T20)
• Reference point accuracy
• Deviations due to ambient temperature
in % from measuring range
%
0.05 °C per K deviation from T20
• Measuring cycle
ms
500
1 ... 99 Kelvin, for both values
• Hysteresis settings
- for temperature 1
s
0 ... 999
mA
mA
Typical 1
Typical 0.2
-
-
• Open-circuit detection
Yes1)
Yes
Yes
• Short-circuit detection
Yes
No
No
• 3-wire conductor connection
Yes2)
-
-
Adjustable delay time
Sensor circuits
7
• Typical sensor circuits
- PT100
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
Enclosures
Environmental influences
Permissible ambient temperature
Permissible storage temperature
Permissible mounting position
°C
°C
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(pollution degree 3)
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +80
any
V AC
300
Conductor cross-section
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 ... 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6
Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27
g/ms
15/11
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.
3) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.
7/92
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440
■ Dimensional drawings
4
7
4 5
5
3 6
6 5
8 6
A
C
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital
Spring-loaded terminal
84
108
Screw-type terminal
83
106
C
A
1 0 2
6 8
9 2
Removable terminal
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
■ Schematics
Connection examples
General equipment designation
3RS10 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS20 40
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
Y 1 / Y 2 /
Y 3 Y 4
K1, K2, K3 output relay
A 1
M e m o ry /
R e s e t
T 1
T 2
T 3
K 1
1 5
K 2
1 8
1 6
2 5
1
2 8
2
K 3
R e a d y
2 6
3 3
Item code
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
3 4
A 2
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 7 d
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples
3RS11 40, 3RS11 42, 3RS21 40
1 5
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper for 3RS10 40, 3RS11 40,
3RS20 40, 3RS21 40 or Y3/Y4 Reset input for 3RS10 42,
3RS11 42
1 8
1 6
2 5
Caution!
A 1
M e m o ry /
R e s e t
K 1
1
K 2
T -
2 8
2
T +
K 3
R e a d y
2 6
3 3
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
7
Y 1 / Y 2 /
Y 3 Y 4
3 4
A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 9 c
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/93
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
■ Overview
The 3RS10 41 temperature monitoring relays can be used for
measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for
staying within an operating range (window function). The signal
evaluator can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors at the same
time and is specially designed for monitoring motor windings
and bearings.
■ Technical specifications
Type
3RS10 41
General data
Width
mm
45
Operating range
V
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Rated power
W/VA
< 4/7
Auxiliary circuits
1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
Contacts
Rated operational currents Ie
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC
- 240 V AC
A
3
A
A
1
0.1
DIAZED fuse
• gl/Gg operational class
A
4
Electrical endurance AC-15 at 3 A
A
100000
30 x 106
Mechanical endurance
Mechanical operating cycles
Tripping units
< –2 K, –1 digit
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature
(T20)
• Deviations due to ambient temperature
in % from measuring range
%
0.05 per K deviation from T20
• Measuring cycle
ms
500
1 ... 99 K, for both values
• Hysteresis settings for temperature 1
• Adjustable delay time
s
0 ... 999
mA
mA
Typical 1
Typical 0.2
Sensor circuits
• Typical sensor circuits
- PT100
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
• Open-circuit detection
Yes1)
• Short-circuit detection
Yes
• 3-wire conductor connection
Yes2)
7
Enclosures
Environmental influences
Permissible ambient temperature
Permissible storage temperature
Permissible mounting position
°C
°C
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(pollution degree 3)
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +80
any
V AC
300
Conductor cross-section
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
• Screw-type connection
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 ... 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal
- Solid
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6
5 ... 26 Hz/0.75 mm
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27
15 g/11 ms
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.
3) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.
7/94
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
■ Dimensional drawings
4
7
4 5
5
3 6
6 5
8 6
A
C
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital
Spring-loaded terminal
84
108
Screw-type terminal
83
106
C
A
1 0 2
6 8
9 2
Removable terminal
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
■ Schematics
Equipment designation for 3RS10 41
Connection example
Y1 Y2
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
A1
Memory
1T1
1T2
1T3
2T1
2T2
2T3
3T1
3T2
3T3
K1
15
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
K2
18
16
25
1T1 to 1T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 1
K3
28
26
33
34
3T1 to 3T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 3
1
2
Ready
2T1 to 2T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 2
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper
A2
NSB0_01338c
K1, K2, K3 output relay
Caution!
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
7
General equipment designation
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/95
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
■ Overview
Thermistor motor protection devices are used for direct
monitoring of the motor winding temperature. For this purpose,
the motors are equipped with temperature-dependent resistors
(PTC) that are directly installed in the motor winding and abruptly
change their resistance at their limit temperature.
■ Design
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for use in any climate and
finger-safe according to EN 0106 Part 50274. They comply with:
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4, "Electromagnetic
compatibility of I&C equipment in industrial process
engineering"
• EN 60947-8
The terminals of the auxiliary contacts are designated in
accordance with EN 50005.
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for snap-on mounting onto
35 mm standard mounting rails according to EN 50022 or for
screw-mounting using an adapter (Accessories).
Any mounting position is possible.
For devices with the "Manual RESET" function, the test function
can be activated and a trip simulated by pressing the blue
Test/RESET button for longer than 2 seconds.
If a Type A temperature sensor is connected to a Type A tripping
unit, compliance with the operating temperatures is assured (on
pick-up and reset) according to IEC 60034-11-2 (EN 60947-8).
4000
R
1330
With PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G, compliance with
guideline 94/9 EG Appendix II is confirmed. The safety devices
must be selected with suitable settings for the safe operation of
motors of the "Increased safety" (EEx e) and "Flameproof
enclosure" (EEx d) degrees of protection and are accessed
outside the area subject to explosion hazard.
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G
The increased danger in areas subject to explosion hazard
demands careful analysis of the operator's guide, the safety and
commissioning instructions and the standard (EN 60079-14/
VDE 0165) for electronic equipment in areas subject to gas
explosion hazards.
A risk analysis must be performed for the complete plant or
machine. If this risk analysis results in a minimal potential for
danger (Safety Category 1), all 3RN1 TMS tripping units can be
implemented taking into account the safety notes. In the case of
plants or machines with a high potential risk, variants with
integrated short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit are
necessary.
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G
250
20
NSB00320
7
All devices are approved for Equipment Group II, Category (2)
in Area "G" (areas that contain explosive gases, vapor, spray and
air mixtures).
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for dust
550
-20°C 0
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for gases
TNF-20 TNF TNF+15 T
TNF-5 TNF+5
The characteristic curves of the Type A temperature sensors are
described in EN 60947-8, DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
3RN10 11-.B/-.G, 3RN10 12-.B/-.G and 3RN10 13-...0 tripping
units can be used as safety devices for motors in areas subject
to gas explosion hazard for protection against impermissible
overheating due to overload. If the ATEX marking has the
extension "D:=Dust", these units can also be used as protective
devices for motors in areas subject to dust explosion hazard
(EN 50281-1-1).
Additional information is provided in the EU type test certificate
which can be obtained from the Internet. The units comply with
the requirements of the following classes:
Device
Class
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11-.C,
3RN10 12-.C, 3RN10 22, 3RN10 62
EN 954-1: Category 1
3RN10 11-.B, 3RN10 11-.G,
3RN10 12-.B, 3RN10 12-.G,
3RN10 13
EN 954-1: Category 2
The measuring circuit leads must be routed as separate control
leads. It is not permitted to use cores from the supply line of the
motor or any other main supply cables. If extreme inductive or
capacitive interference is expected as a result of power lines
routed in parallel, shielded control leads must be used.
7/96
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
Cable routing
Maximum cable length for sensor circuit cables
Conductor crosssection in mm2
Cable length in m for tripping units
Without short-circuit
detection
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10
3RN10 11-.C
3RN10 12-.C
3RN10 22, 3RN10 62
With short-circuit
detection1)
3RN10 11-.B/-.G
3RN10 12-.B/-.G
3RN10 13
2.5
2 x 2800
2 x 250
1.5
2 x 1500
2 x 150
0.5
2 x 500
2 x 50
1) A short-circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum
cable length.
■ Function
The 3RN1 tripping units operate in accordance with the closedcircuit principle and therefore monitor themselves for opencircuit (except: warning output in the case of 3RN10 22).
A momentary power failure of less than 50 ms does not change
the status of the auxiliary contacts. The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12
and 3RN10 13 units with 2 changeover contacts are also
equipped with short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit. The
unit will trip in the event of a short-circuit in the sensor circuit
(resistance in sensor circuit < 20 W).
All tripping units (except for 24 V AC/DC ) feature electrical
isolation between the control circuit and the sensor circuit.
3RN10 00 compact tripping units
The compact tripping unit is equipped with a red LED (TRIPPED)
for the tripped display and a changeover contact.
Tripping of the thermistor protection relay even in combination
with a converter must directly result in disconnection. This must
be implemented with circuitry.
After the unit has tripped, it is automatically reset once the
thermistors have cooled down. The root of the changeover
contact is connected to the control voltage (95 is connected to
terminal A1).
Mounting and installation must only be performed by qualified
personnel who observe the applicable regulations! For
mounting, use installation manual No.: 3ZX1012-0RN10-1AA1.
This unit is particularly suitable in circuits in which the control
circuit and signaling circuit have the same potential, e.g. in local
control boxes.
The 3RN10 is not intended for installation in hazardous areas.
For installation in areas subject to explosion hazards, the 3RN10
must be enclosed in a flameproof casing.
For tripping units with a 24 V AC/DC control voltage, electrical
isolation must be secured with a battery network or a safety
transformer according to DIN VDE 0551.
When tripping units with Auto-RESET function are used, a reset
is performed automatically after the cooling time has expired. It
must be ensured by means of an external interlock (latching with
a separate On and Off button) that the machine to be monitored
does not start up again spontaneously.
Units with the Auto-RESET function must not be used in
applications in which the unexpected restart can lead to
personal injury or property damage.
In the case of tripping units without short-circuit detection,
during commissioning or after modifications or maintenance
work (assembly, disassembly) on the equipment, the sensor
resistance must be measured using a suitable measuring
instrument. For resistances < 50 Ohm, the sensor circuit must
be checked for a short-circuit.
If 3RN10 00 units are used to protect EEx e motors, separate
monitoring of the control voltage is recommended because there
is no Ready LED to indicate connection to the supply voltage.
If 3RN10 13-.BW01 units are used to protect EEx e motors,
separate monitoring of the control voltage is recommended
because the switching status of the auxiliary contacts does not
change if the control voltage fails (use of a bistable relay is
recommended).
Before commissioning, the effectiveness of the protection
function must be checked.
3RN10 10, 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12, 3RN10 13 standard tripping
units
The standard units are equipped with two LEDs (READY and
TRIPPED) for an operating and tripped display and are available
with either 1 NO + 1 NC or with 2 CO contacts. They are available
depending on the version with automatic RESET (3RN10 10),
manual/remote RESET (3RN10 11) or manual/automatic and
remote RESET (3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13). Remote RESET can
be achieved by connecting an external pushbutton with a
normally-open function to terminals Y1 and Y2. If terminals Y1
and Y2 are bridged, tripping will be followed by an automatic
RESET.
The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13 units with 2 COs also
have short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.
The 3RN10 12 and the 3RN10 13 are non-volatile. This means
that even if the control voltage fails, a preceding trip will be
latched.
In the case of the 3RN10 13 tripping unit, tripping due to a shortcircuit in the sensor circuit will be indicated by a flashing red
LED. The monostable version also indicates open-circuit in the
sensor circuit by flashing of the red LED.
3RN10 22 "Warning and disconnection" tripping units
Two sensor circuits can be connected to one 3RN10 22 tripping
unit that acts on one output relay with 1 NO contact for warning
and 1 CO for disconnection. Temperature sensors with different
rated response temperatures TNF are used to implement the
"Warning" and "Disconnection" functions. When the "Warning"
sensor circuit responds, a yellow LED is lit and when the
"Disconnection" circuit responds, a red LED is lit.
The sensor circuits have a different reset response and
operating behavior:
• "Warning" (terminals 2T1, T2) only features automatic RESET
and uses the open-circuit principle.
• "Disconnection" (terminals 1T1, T2) can be changed from
manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking terminals Y1
and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an
external pushbutton with a normally-open function.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/97
7
Notes:
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
3RN10 62 tripping units for multiple motor protection
Up to 6 sensor circuits can be connected to the 3RN10 62
tripping unit, all of which act on one output relay. The
simultaneous protection of several motors (up to 6) is an
advantage for multi-motor drives (e.g. if one motor is
overloaded, all the other motors of the drive will be shut down).
Apart from the red LED TRIPPED, which signals the switching
status of the tripping unit, an LED is assigned to each sensor
circuit which indicates the sensor circuit that has responded.
Unused sensor circuits must be short-circuited.
The reset response of the 3RN10 62 tripping units can be
changed from manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking
terminals Y1 and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by
connecting an external pushbutton with a normally-open
function.
Response of the tripping units in the event of control voltage
failure
Behavior
Monostable
Non-volatile
Monostable
Bistable
3RN10 00
3RN10 10
3RN10 11
3RN10 12
3RN10 13-...0
3RN10 22
3RN10 62
3RN10 13-...01
Device trips
Device trips
No change in
state of the
auxiliary contacts
for
Failure of the
control voltage
3RN10 111)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 1 5 c
A 1 /A 2
3 8 0 0
1 5 0 0
T 1 /T 2
(Y 1 /Y 2 )
K
L E D T r ip p e d
3RN10 13-...01
NSB0_00316a
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
K
LED Tripped
3RN10 121)/3RN10 22/3RN10 62
Return of the
Device resets
control voltage
without a
preceding
tripping operation
Device resets
No change in
state of the
auxiliary contacts
Return of the
Device resets
control voltage
after a preceding
tripping operation
The device
remains tripped
No change in
state of the
auxiliary contacts
NSB0_00317a
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
K, K2
LED Tripped
3RN10 13-...0
7
Safe electrical isolation
NSB0_00318a
All circuits (outputs, control circuits, sensor and RESET circuits)
of the multifunction tripping units 3RN10 13-1BW10 and
3RN10 13-1GW10 (wide voltage range, monostable output relay
and screw-type terminals) are safely isolated from each other
up to a rated voltage of 300 V according to DIN VDE 0100
Part 410/EN 60947-1.
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
K
LED Tripped
Function diagrams
3RN10 00/3RN10 10
(Auto-RESET)
3RN10 22 only
NSB0_00314b
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
3800
1500
2T1/T2
NSB0_00319b
K1
LED Alarm
K
LED Tripped
1) For versions with 2 CO (3RN10 1.G...): See 3RN10 13. function diagram
for short-circuit response of sensor circuit.
7/98
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
■ Technical specifications
Type
Compact
units
Standard units
3RN10 00
3RN10 10
3RN10 11
3RN10 12
Multifunction Warning +
units
tripping
Multiple
motor
protection
3RN10 13
3RN10 62
3RN10 22
General data
Width
mm
22.5
Number of connectable sensor
circuits
1
Response in the event of control
voltage failure
1)
45
2
Manual RESET
No
Yes
Automatic RESET
Yes
No
Yes
Remote RESET
No
Yes2)
Yes
TEST pushbutton
No
Yes
Short-circuit detection for sensor
circuit
No
Yes (for 2 CO units)
Short-circuit and open-circuit
indication
No
Warning and switching off in one unit
No
Yes
No
Yes3)
No
Yes
6
No
Tripping units
Rated insulation voltage Ui
(pollution degree 3)
V
300
Permissible ambient temperature
°C
-25 … +60
Permissible storage temperature
°C
-40 … +80
EMC tests
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
Degree of protection acc. to EN
60529/VDE 0470-1
IP20
Conductor cross-section
Screw-type connection
• Solid
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
• Tightening torque
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve
• Finely stranded, without end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
M3
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 ... 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Sensor circuits
Voltage in sensor circuit
at RF ˆ 1.5 mW
V
ˆ2
Response temperature
(depends on sensor)
°C
60 ... 180
Coupling time
(depends on sensor)
s
Approx. 5
Summation PTC resistance RF
(per sensor loop)
• Operating value
• Return value
kW
ˆ 1.5
kW
kW
3.4 ... 3.8
1.5 ... 1.65
• Response tolerance
°C
–6
7
ˆ5
Measuring circuit load
at RF ˆ 1.5 mW
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data.
2) Remote RESET possible by disconnecting control voltage.
3) Open-circuits are only indicated by monostable versions
(3RN10 13-....0).
4) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/99
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
Type
Compact
units
Standard units
3RN10 00
3RN10 10
3RN10 11
3RN10 12
Multifunction Warning +
units
tripping
Multiple
motor
protection
3RN10 13
3RN10 22
3RN10 62
12)
1
2
3RN10 131BW10
--
Control circuits
1)
Rated control supply voltage Us
Operating range
110 V/230 V AC
• 24 V ... 240 V AC/DC
• 24 V AC/DC
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us for DC operation, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us for AC operation
Rated power
• AC
• AC/DC
• DC
W
W
W
<2
<2
<2
Max. mains buffering time
ms
50
Auxiliary circuits
Continuous thermal current Ithe
A
5
Rated operational current Ie
• AC-15 240 V
• DC-13 24 V
A
A
3
1 for units with 1 CO or 2 COs
2 for units with 1 NC + 1 NO
DIAZED fuse
A
63)
CSA and UL rated data, control circuit
Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz
• AC
• DC
V
V
300
300
Switching capacity
R 300/B 300
Safe isolation up to 300 V
acc. to DIN 60 947-1
--
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data.
2) 2 A for 3RN10 13-.BW01 (bistable output relays).
3) In > 1 kA weld-free acc. to EN 60947-5-1.
■ Dimensional drawings
3RN10 62
4 5
5
6 8
9 2
7
A
B
C
74
62
82
110
62
90
7
4
6 5
8 6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
NSB0_01606
15
22,5
15
22,5
A
B
C
A
3RN10 00
3RN10 00
3RN10 11
3RN10 12
3RN10 13
3RN10 22
3RN10 62
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded
terminal
84
94
103
Screw-type
terminal
83
92
102
7/100
3 6
A
86
36
C
5
1 0 2
3RN1. with 1 ... 2 sensor circuits
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
C
Standard terminal
Spring-loaded terminal
84.3
107.6
Screw-type terminal
81
104
Spring-loaded terminal
84
108
Screw-type terminal
83
106
Removable terminal
Monitoring Relays
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
■ Schematics
Connection diagrams
Illustrated with control
voltage applied
Illustrated with control Illustrated with control
voltage not applied
voltage applied
Illustrated with control
voltage not applied
3RN10 00, 1 CO
A1/95
A1, A2, A3
A1(11)
N
T/R
Y1, Y2
H2 K
(14) (12)
96 98
NSB0_00322b
Â
3RN10 10, 1 NO + 1 NC
3RN10 10, 2 COs
A1
95 97
(13) (21)
N
T1 T2
H2
A1
H1
H1
N
K
A2
T1 T2
(14) (22)
96 98
(11)
05
A2
96 98 06 08
(14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01397
3RN10 111), 1 NO + 1 NC
A1
3RN10 11, 2 COs
95 97
A1
(13) (21)
H1
H1
H2
N
N
K
A2
T1 T2
(14) (22)
96 98
NSB0_00323b
T/R
A1(A3)
N
T1 T2
H2
(11)
05
H2 K
A2
97
(13) (21)
96 98 06 08
(14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01398
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
K
N
96
(14) (22)
98
T1 T2
NSB0_00325a
T/R
95
(11)
05
N
T1 T2
95
(11)
05
A2
96 98 06 08
(14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01399a
T/R
96 98 06 08
N
T1 T2
(11)
05
96 98 06 08
H1
H2
H3
K1, K2
1T1 and T2
2T1 and T2
H7
H8
K
1T1, 1T2
to
6T1, 6T2
(21)
H2 K
A2
Equipment designation for
3RN10 22
H1 to H6
3RN10 13-...1 (bistable)
95
"READY" LED
"TRIPPED" LED
Output relay
Connections of the
sensor loop
"READY" LED
"TRIPPED" LED
"ALARM" LED
Output relay
Connections of the
sensor loop
Equipment designation for 3RN10 62
NSB0_01400
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
H1
H2
K
T1, T2
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
(14) (12) (24) (22)
T/R
Equipment designation for 3RN10
. Important!
(21)
H2 K
A2
(21)
H2 K
3RN10 13-...0 (monostable)
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
(21)
3RN10 12, 2 COs
95
A2
95
T/R
3RN10 121), 1 NO + 1 NC
Y1 Y2
H1
(21)
H2 K
NSB0_00323b
T/R
T1 T2
95
Connections of the
control voltage
Amplifier
TEST/RESET button
Connections for remote
RESET (jumpered =
Auto-RESET)
The double arrow
indicates an operating
status which deviates
from the standard
representation of the
contact acc. to
DIN 40900, Part 7
(in this case: Position of
the contacts when
control voltage is applied
to terminals A1 and A2)
(14) (12) (24) (22)
LED for the tripped
sensor loop
"READY" LED
"TRIPPED" LED
Output relay
Connections of the
first sensor loop
Connections of the
sixth sensor loop
NSB0_00327
T/R
. Important!
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
3RN10 22
07(23)
Y1 Y2
H3
K1
08(24) 2T1 1T1
A1
95
(11)
H2
N
N
T2
H1 K2
A2
T/R
96 98
(14) (12)
NSB0_00328c
3RN10 62
Y1 Y2
H1 2
H4 5
1T1 1T2 2T1 2T2 3T1 3T2 4T1 4T2 5T1 5T2 6T1 6T2
T/R
A1
N
95 97
(13) (21)
3
6
H7 H8
A2
K
96 98
(14) (22)
NSB0_00329a
1) For units with combination voltages 230 V/110 V AC
(3RN10 11-.CK00 and 3RN10 12-.CK00) the following applies:
A1 and A2: 230 V AC,
A3 and A2: 110 V AC.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/101
7
N
A2
T1 T2
General equipment designation
3TK28 Safety Relays
With electronic enabling circuits
■ Overview
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device
Type
Connection
1-channel
Crossover
protection
EMERGENCY- Protective
STOP
door
Solid-state
sensors
Cascading
input
Safety mats
B
1
2
3
4
3TK28 40
basic unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 41
standard unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
✔
3TK28 42
standard unit
tv
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
✔
3TK28 45
multi-function
unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
✔
Type
2-channel
Category acc. to EN 954-1
Enabling circuit,
floating
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Signaling
circuit
Autostart Monitored
start
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
category category category category
0
1
0
1
24 V DC
Switching capacity Rated operational
voltage
AC-15
DC-13
at
at
U=230 V U=24 V
24 V
DC
Rated control supply Control
voltage
inputs
230 V 600 V 24 V
AC
AC
DC
115 V 230 V 24 V
AC
AC
DC
3TK28 40
basic unit
--
--
21)
--
--
✔
✔
--
0.5 A
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 41
standard unit
--
--
2
--
--
✔
✔
--
1.5 A
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 42
standard unit
tv
--
--
1
1
--
✔
✔
--
1.5 A
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
2A
1.5 A
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 45
multi-function
unit
1
1
1
1
1 HL
2
--
2
--
1 HL
✔ = available
-- = not available
1) The outputs are only safe when an external contactor is used.
■ Design
Installation
For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail
according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the
devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
■ Function
The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41)
7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and
diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.
7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are
monitored by a cyclic self-test.
7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults
to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc.
7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both
processors. The output driver must be activated
simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then is the
voltage connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to
output terminals 14 + 24.
7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically
monitored by the processors.
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored
start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and
cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection
terminals.
7/102
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Y11 Y12
Y35
Y21
Y22
Y32
Y34
A1
1
NSC0_00606a
7
The solid-state safety relays can be used in EMERGENCY-STOP
devices to EN 418 and in safety circuits to EN 60204-1 (11.98),
for example, for moving covers and protective doors.
Depending on the device type and the external circuit, the
maximum category that can be achieved is Category 4 of
EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508.
FET
µC1
µC2
Output driver
Ausgangstreiber
A2
14
24
3TK28 Safety Relays
With electronic enabling circuits
■ Technical specifications
Type
3TK28 40
Standards
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508, DIN VDE 01161)
Category acc. to EN 954-1
3
Test certificates
TÜV, UL, CSA
3TK28 41
3TK28 42
3TK28 45
4
4
4
Rated insulation voltage Ui
• For control circuit
• For outputs
V
V
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50/300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
• For control circuit
• For outputs
V
V
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500/2000
Operating range
• DC operation
0.9 ... 1.15 × Us
Rated operational currents Ie
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• Ie /AC-15
at 115 V
at 230 V
A
A
---
---
---
2
--
• Ie / DC-13
at 24 V
A
0.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Short-circuit proof2)
Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit proof
Electrical endurance
Unlimited, because switched electronically
Operating frequency z
in operating cycles/h during normal duty
1/h
3000
Response time
• Monitored start
• Autostart
ms
ms
125
250
60
60
60
60
60
60
release time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
ms
30
45
453)/0.05 ... 300 s
(adjustable)
100
• For supply failure
ms
25
1004)
453)/0.05 ... 300 s
(adjustable)
1004)
Recovery time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
• For supply failure
ms
s
20
0.02
400
max. 7
400
max. 7
400
max. 7
Bridging of supply failures
ms
255)
254)5)
254)5)
255)
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP
• ON button
ms
s
20
0.02
25
0.2 ... 5
30
0.2 ... 5
30
0.2 ... 5
Simultaneity
ms
Š
Screw-type connection
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Solid
• Tightening torque
mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)
Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Finely stranded without end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 × AWG 24 ... 16
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
–25 ... +60
–40 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100
Finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Sinewave
Permissible mounting position
7
Conductor cross-sections
g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
Any
1) Electrical equipment for furnaces.
VDE certificate for 3TK28 41 and 3TK28 42 is available.
2) For relay outputs, use a fuse link:
LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE:
6 A (weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA).
3) For instantaneous output.
4) When the cascading input is supplied from A1, the maximum response
time is applicable to an external EMERGENCY-STOP.
5) The drivers are not supplied, internal supply bridging only.
SELV/PELV power supply unit buffered.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/103
3TK28 Safety Relays
With electronic enabling circuits
■ Dimensional drawings
3TK28 with screw-type terminals
3TK28 with spring-loaded terminals
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42
7
4
7
2,5
NSC0_00677
5
15
23
36
15
22,5
65
86
3
86
96
105
86
7
NSC0_00673
7
5
37
45
65
94
115
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50002.
7/104
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
5
86
110
102
75
98
118
139
83
106
102
68
91
118
139
NSC0_00672
37
45
7
5
3TK28 45
3TK28 45
4
74
75
94
110
120
83
92
102
74
68
87
110
120
NSC0_00678
115
3TK28 Safety Relays
With relay enabling circuits
■ Overview
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device
Type
1-channel
connection
2-channel
connection
Crossover
protection
Category
acc. to EN 954-1
B
1
2
3
4
EMERGENCYSTOP
Protective
door
Enabling
contacts
Signaling Autostart
contacts
Monitored
start
Basic units
3TK28 21
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
3 NO
1 NC
✔
3TK28 22
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔2)
✔
2 NO
--
✔
--
3TK28 23
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
2 NO
--
--
✔
--
3TK28 24
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
2 NO
--
✔
–
3TK28 25
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3 NO
2 NC
✔
✔
3TK28 27
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1)
✔
--
2 NO +
2 NO,
delayed
1 NC
--
✔
3TK28 28
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1)
✔
✔
2 NO +
2 NO,
delayed
1 NC
✔
--
●
●
●
●
●
--
--
4 NO
--
--
--
Expansion devices (category as for basic unit)
3TK28 30
--
--
●
Press control devices (acc. to EN 574)
3TK28 34
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
2 NO + 2 NC --
--
--
3TK28 35
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
3 NO + 1 NC --
--
--
✔ = available
-- = not available
● = corresponds to basic unit
1) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts.
2) The ON button is not monitored.
■ Design
The 3TK28 21 to 28, 3TK28 30 and 3TK28 34 safety relays
operate with internal contactor relays with positively-driven
contacts. The contacts of the controls comply with the
requirement for positively driven operation laid down in
ZH 1/457, Edition 2, 1978. NO and NC contacts are not allowed
to be closed at the same time.
Delayed enabling contacts
In a redundant circuit, operation of the internal controls is
monitored. If a safety relay fails, it will always switch to the deenergized and consequently safe state. The fault is detected
and the safety relay can no longer be switched on. The use of
NO and NC contacts for the same function satisfies the demand
for diversity.
The basic units have off-delay enabling contacts in addition to
instantaneous enabling contacts. Time delays of between 0.5
and 30 s are available with the different versions. A 3RP19 02
sealable covering cap (see Catalog LV 1, Selection and ordering
data, Accessories) can be fitted to protect against unauthorized
adjustment of the set delay time.
This product series is characterized by its space-saving width
(22.5 mm or 45 mm). The usual BIA, BG and SUVA approvals
and test certificates have been awarded.
Expansion units
Enabling contacts (FK)
Safety related operation must be performed by safe output
contacts, known as enabling contacts. Enabling contacts are
always NO contacts and switch without delay.
Signaling contacts (MK)
NC contacts are used as signaling contacts but they are not
permitted to perform functions with relevance for safety. An
enabling contact can also be used as a signaling contact. A
signaling contact cannot, however, be used as an enabling
contact.
If the enabling contacts of the basic unit are inadequate,
expansion units can be used. An expansion unit has 4 enabling
contacts.
Expansion units are not allowed to be operated separately in
safety-related switching circuits; they must be combined with a
basic unit. One enabling contact of the basic unit is required for
connecting an expansion unit. The category of a control system
with expansion unit corresponds to that of the basic unit.
Installation
The equipment is designed for snap-on mounting on a 35 mm
standard mounting rail to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible
for the devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/105
7
Machine drives that overrun for a long time must be externally
braked in the event of danger. For this purpose, the power
supply for electrical braking can be maintained (Stop
Category 1 according to EN 60204-1).
3TK28 Safety Relays
With relay enabling circuits
■ Technical specifications
Type
3TK28 21 3TK28 22 3TK28 23 3TK28 24 3TK28 30 3TK28 25 3TK28 27,
3TK28 28
3TK28 34 3TK28 35
Standards
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1
Also EN 574
Test certificates
BG, SUVA, UL, CSA
Category
• Acc. to EN 954-1
• Acc. to EN 574
3
--
4
--
4
--
3
--
As basic
unit
4
--
4 1)
--
4
As basic
Type III C unit
4
3
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Degree of pollution
Overvoltage category acc. to EN 60664
V
300
3
III
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
4
Rated power of coils
DC/AC operation at 1.0 × Us
W
1.5
3
0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
0.85 ... 1.2 × Us
0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
5
6
5
6
5
5
6
6
4
5
5
5
6
6
4
5
5
Operating range of the coils
• AC operation
• DC operation
A
Continuous thermal current Ith
Continuous thermal current Ith
for 2 to 4 enabling contacts (FK)
• At AT 70 °C
• At AT 60 °C
• At AT 50 °C
A
A
A
2 FK
3 FK
4 FK
4
4.5
5
3.5
4
4.5
3
3.5
4
Rated operational currents Ie
acc. to IEC 60947-1
• Ie / AC-15
at 115 V
at 230 V
A
A
5
5
6
6
5/24)
5/24)
6
6
5/25)
5/25)
• Ie / DC-13
at 24 V
A
5
6
5/24)
6
5/25)
Short-circuit protection
(weld-free protection at Ik = 1 kA) 3)
Fuse inserts LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE: 6 A
gL/gG operational class 6 A (slow), quick 10 A2)
Mechanical endurance
10 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie
100000 operating cycles
1000/h on loading with Ie
7
Switching frequency
Response time
• Monitored start
• Autostart
ms
ms
ms
-ˆ 2006)
-ˆ 100
ˆ 30
--
-ˆ 2006)7)
ˆ 308)
---
ˆ 25
ˆ 150
ˆ 80
ˆ 80
ˆ 100
---
ˆ 50
---
Release time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
• For supply failure
ms
ms
ms
ˆ 200
ˆ 200
ˆ 80
ˆ 100
ˆ 20
ˆ 150
ˆ 200
ˆ 200
–
ˆ 259)
ˆ 25
ˆ 350
ˆ 25
ˆ 100
ˆ 20
---
ˆ 50
---
Recovery time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
ms
˜ 200
˜ 200
˜ 400
˜ 200
--
˜ 200
• For supply failure
ms
˜ 200
˜ 200
˜ 600
˜ 200
˜ 100
Bridging of supply failures
ms
60
30
80
60
35
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP
• ON button
ms
ms
˜ 200
˜ 150
˜ 25
˜ 40
˜ 25
˜ 25
˜ 2007)
˜ 1507)
---
Simultaneity
ms
Š
˜ 250
--
˜ 500
˜ 250
After time
-has elapsed
˜1s
--
100
30
40
40
˜ 25
˜ 25
˜ 25
˜ 25
---
---
500
Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type connection
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Solid
• Tightening torque, M 3.5 screw
mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)
Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Finely stranded without end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
2
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 × AWG 24 ... 16
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
–25 ... +60 (suitable for butt-mounting; 70 °C possible with restrictions)
–40 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Touch protection acc. to VDE 0106
Finger-safe
Shock resistance, half-sine acc. to IEC 60068
8 g/10 ms
Permissible mounting position
Any
IP20
IP20
1) Only applicable for instantaneous enabling contacts; Category 3 applies
for time-delayed contacts.
6) At 24 V AC: 300 ms.
2) Signaling circuit for 3TK28 21 = 6 A.
8) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 200 ms.
3) Other fuses on request.
9) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 80 ms.
4) Instantaneous/time-delayed enabling contacts.
5) 2 A applies to enabling contacts 13/14.
7/106
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7) At 115, 230 V AC: 300 ms.
--
3TK28 Safety Relays
With relay enabling circuits
■ Dimensional drawings
3TK28 (relay type) with screw terminals
3TK28 (relay type) with spring-loaded terminals
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30
4
2,4
7
7
NSC0_00674
15
23
5
15
22,5
65
94
84
103
74
74
93
110
120
83
102
74
68
87
110
120
NSC0_00671
5
115
115
3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
3
7
7
NSC0_00673
37
45
5
37
45
65
94
5
86
110
102
75
98
118
139
83
106
102
NSC0_00672
68
91
118
139
4
115
115
7
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50022
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/107
3TK28 Safety Relays
With contactor relay enabling circuits
■ Overview
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device
Type
Connection
1-channel
Crossover
protection
EMERGENCY- Protective
STOP
door
Solid-state
sensors
Cascading
input
Safety mats
B
1
2
3
4
3TK28 50
basic unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 51
basic unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 52
basic unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
3TK28 53
basic unit
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
✔
3TK28 56
expansion
unit
--
--
●
●
●
●
●
●
--
--
--
1
--
3TK28 57
expansion
unit tv
--
--
●
●
●
●
●
●
--
--
--
1
--
Type
2-channel
Category acc. to EN 954-1
Enabling circuit,
floating
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Signaling
circuit
Autostart Monitored
start
24 V DC
Switching capacity Rated operational
voltage
DC-13
AC-15
at
at
U=230 V U=24 V
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
category category category category
1
0
1
0
24 V
DC
Rated control supply Control
voltage
inputs
230 V 600 V 24 V
AC
AC
DC
115 V 230 V 24 V
AC
AC
DC
3TK28 50
basic unit
3
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
3TK28 51
basic unit
2
--
--
--
1 NC
✔
✔
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
3TK28 52
basic unit
6
--
--
--
1 NC
✔
✔
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
3TK28 53
basic unit
3
--
1
--
--
✔
✔
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
1
3TK28 56
expansion
unit
6
--
1
--
1 NC
--
--
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
1
3TK28 57
expansion
unit tv
--
3
1
--
--
--
--
6A
10 A
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
1
7
✔ = available
-- = not available
● = corresponds to basic unit
7/108
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
3TK28 Safety Relays
With contactor relay enabling circuits
The solid-state safety combinations can be used in
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to EN 418 and in safety
circuits according to EN 60204-1 (11.98), for example, for
moving covers and protective doors. Depending on the device
type and the external circuit, the maximum category that can be
achieved is Category 4 of EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to
IEC 61508.
With these devices, solid-state safety relays are connected with
contactor relays. The combination is supplied as a complete
self-contained unit, fully wired up and tested, for snapping onto
a standard mounting rail. This unit combines the advantages of
a solid-state safety relay and those of contactor relays with
positively-driven contacts in a single device. It has been certified
by the appropriate authorities as a complete unit.
Basic units, Category 3
The solid-state safety relays 3TK28 50, 51 and 52 have two
contactor relays snapped onto the safety solid-state unit as
floating switch blocks. Three LEDs indicate the operating status
and the function. During operation, all internal circuit elements
are monitored cyclically for faults. Up to Category 3 according to
EN 954-1 is achieved, depending on the external circuit.
■ Function
The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41)
7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and
diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.
7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are
monitored by a cyclic self-test.
7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults
to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc.
7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both
processors. The output driver must be activated
simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then, the
voltage is connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to
output terminals 14 + 24.
7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically
monitored by the processors.
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored
start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and
cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection
terminals.
Y11 Y12
Y35
Y21
Y22
Y32
Y34
A1
1
NSC0_00606a
■ Design
Basic units, Category 4
The 3TK28 53 solid-state safety relay has two contactor relays
snapped onto the safety solid-state units as floating switch
blocks, as well as a safe solid-state output, a safe input for
cascading and one input for normal switching duty. Three LEDs
indicate the operating status and the function.
FET
µC1
µC2
During start-up, the equipment runs through a self-test in which
the internal electronics are checked for correct functioning.
Output driver
During operation, all internal circuit elements are monitored
cyclically for faults.
Expansion units and the 3TK28 30, 3TK28 56/57, 3RA7 11, 12,
13, 14 devices as well as external actuators or loads can be
connected using the safe solid-state output (terminal 2).
Cascading with the 3TK28 41/42/45/53 safety combinations as
well as with the 3RA7 11 load feeder is also possible using the
safe solid-state output (terminal 2).
A2
14
24
Installation
7
For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail
according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the
devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/109
3TK28 Safety Relays
With contactor relay enabling circuits
■ Technical specifications
Type
3TK28 50
Standards
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Category acc. to EN 954-1
3
Test certificates
TÜV, UL, CSA
Rated insulation voltage Ui
• For control circuit
• For output contacts
• For pollution severity
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
• For control circuit
• For output contacts
V
V
50
690
3
V
kV
500
6
Coil operating range
• AC operation
• DC operation
3
3TK28 52
3
at 230 V
at 24 V
W
8.5
A
A
6
10 (auxiliary switch blocks: 6)
4
Short-circuit protection
(Weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA)
See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Technical specifications
Mechanical endurance
30 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance
3TK28 56
3TK28 57
As basic unit
As basic unit
See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Characteristic curves
Operating frequency z
In operating cycles/h during normal duty
1/h
1000
Response time
• Monitored start
• Autostart
ms
ms
200
300
200
300
200
300
60
60
---
---
Release time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
ms
30
30
30
50
50
• For supply failure
ms
100
100
100
120
120
501)/
increments
0.05 ... 300 s
120
Recovery time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP
• For supply failure
ms
s
20
0.02
20
0.02
20
0.02
500
7
500
7
500
7
Bridging of supply failures
ms
5
5
5
5
5
5
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP
• ON button
ms
ms
20
20
20
20
20
20
Š
Simultaneity
Conductor cross-sections
7
3TK28 53
0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
0.9 ... 1.15 × Us
Coil ratings
• DC/AC actuation at Us
Rated operational currents Ie
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• Ie / AC-15
• Ie / DC-13
3TK28 51
Screw-type connection
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Solid
• Tightening torque
mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1), 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm2 2 × (0.2 ... 1), 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)
Nm 0.5 ... 0.6
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
• Finely stranded without end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
mm2 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)
2
mm 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 × AWG 24 ... 12
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation
• During storage
°C
°C
–25 ... +60
–40 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• Enclosures
• Terminals
IP40
IP20
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100
Finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Sine wave
Permissible mounting position
1) For instantaneous output.
7/110
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
Any
30
0.2 ... 5 s
3TK28 Safety Relays
With contactor relay enabling circuits
■ Dimensional drawings
3TK28 with floating enabling contacts, with auxiliary-contactor enabling contacts
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57
with screw-type terminals
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57
with spring-loaded terminals
38
26
6
122 x 68
102 x 68
93
132
122 x 68
102 x 68
93
132
44
44
6
38
26
1)
1)
NSC 00507
NSC 00506
90
5
40
90
91
108
5
40
108
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with screw-type terminals
38
26
122 x 68
102 x 68
93
132
44
6
1)
NSC 00505
5
40
91
108
146
7
90
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with spring-loaded terminals
38
26
122 x 68
102 x 68
93
132
44
6
1)
NSC 00508
90
5
40
108
149
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/111
Interface Converters
3RS17 interface converters
■ Overview
Interface converters perform the coupling function for analog
signals on both the input side and the output side. They are
indispensable when processing analog values with electronic
controls. Under harsh industrial conditions in particular, it is often
necessary to transmit analog signals over long distances. This
means that electrical isolation is essential due to the different
supply systems. The resistance of the wiring causes potential
differences and losses which must be prevented.
Electromagnetic disturbance and overvoltages can affect the
signals on the input side in particular or even destroy the analog
modules. All terminals of the 3RS17 interface converters are safe
up to a voltage of 30 V DC and protected against switching
poles. Short-circuit protection is an especially important function
for the outputs.
The devices are EMC-tested according to
• EN 50081 (basic technical standard for emitted interference)
• EN 61000-6-2 (basic technical standard for immunity to
interference)
The analog signals comply with
• IEC 60381-1/2
■ Function
Active interface converters
Input voltage depending on the load at Ia = 20 mA
Active interface converters provide maximum flexibility for the
application by the use of an external supply voltage.
Configuration with active interface converters is extremely easy
because input and output resistances and voltage drops are
compensated by the auxiliary supply. They support complete
voltage isolation as well as conversion from one signal type to
another or reinforcement. The load of the measured value
transmitter is negligible.
The following diagram shows the input voltage UE as a function
of the load RB taking into account the voltage loss UV. If the load
is known, the y-axis shows the minimum voltage that has to be
supplied by the current source in order to drive the maximum
current of 20 mA over the passive isolator and load.
7
2 2 ,7
Passive interface converters
/ V
N S B 0 1 3 1 3 a
2 0
1 5
Passive interface converters do not require an external supply
voltage. This advantage can only be used by current signals that
are converted 1:1. Reinforcement or conversion is not possible.
The converters are used for complete electrical isolation of
current signals and to protect the inputs and outputs. Passive
isolators do not operate reaction-free, any load on the output
produces an equal load on the input. When the passive
converter is to be used, the output performance of the sensor
and the input resistance of the analog input must be analyzed.
This technique is being increasingly implemented in the case of
pure current signals.
7
E
1 0
2 ,7
5
0
0
1 0 0
2
2 0 0
4
3 0 0
6
4 0 0
8
6 0 0
1 2
8 0 0 4
1 6 7
A
B
/ O
/ V
1 0 0 0
2 0
Current carrying capacity of the outputs
A maximum output resistance is specified for current signals.
This resistance value specifies how large the input resistance of
the next device connected in series can be as a result of the
power of the converter.
Calculation guide for passive converters
For voltage signals, the maximum current that can be drawn
from the output is the decisive factor.
Note: Please note the following when using passive isolators:
2-way isolation
The current-driving voltage of the measuring transducer UE must
be sufficient to drive the maximum current of 20 mA over the
passive isolator with a voltage loss of UV = 2.7 V and the load RB.
In the case of 2-way isolation, the input is galvanically isolated
from the output. The "null potential" of the supply voltage is the
same as the reference potential for the analog output signal.
This means that:
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 1 4 a
UB ˜ UE = 2.7 V + 20 mA × RB
IN
Distribution of the voltages in the case of passive isolators
O U T
V c c
2 - w a y is o la tio n
7 B
7 V = 2 ,7 V
3-way isolation
1
7
1
4
E
1
1
B
For the 3-path isolation, each circuit is electrically isolated from
the other circuits, i.e. input, output, and supply voltage do not
have a potential connection.
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 4 3
N S B 0 1 3 1 2 a
IN
O U T
V c c
3 - w a y is o la tio n
7/112
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Interface Converters
3RS17 interface converters
■ Technical specifications
Type 3RS17
24 V AC/DC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
0.7 ... 1.25 x Un
0.8 ... 1.2 x Un
0.7 ... 1.1 x Un
0.8 ... 1.1 x Un
Typical 0.3
Typical 0.75
General data
Supply voltage operating range
DC
AC
W
Rated power
Active disconnector: 1500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min; 4000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Passive disconnector: 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Electrical isolation of input/output
Rated insulation voltage Ui pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0100
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
Conductor cross-sections
Screw terminals
• Conductor cross-section
- Solid
- Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
• Terminal screw
Spring-loaded terminal
• Solid or finely stranded
• Finely stranded with end sleeve
Degree of protection
V
50
°C
°C
-25 ... +60
-40 ... +85
mm2
mm2
1 x (0.25 ... 4)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
M3
mm2
mm2
1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Enclosures IEC 529
Terminals IEC 529
300
IP30
IP20
Any
Permissible mounting position
Mounting onto standard rail EN 50022
mm
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27
g/ms
15/11
35
Input
Impedance
Voltage inputs
Current inputs, active
kW
W
330
100
Input voltage max.
Voltage inputs
Current inputs, active
V
V
30 AC/DC
30 AC/DC
Response current
Current inputs, passive
µA
100/250 (6.2 mm width)
Voltage drop
Current inputs, passive
V
2.7 at 20 mA
Output
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V
W
55
Current 0/4 ... 20 mA active, max.
Current 0 ... 20 mA passive, max.
Frequency, min.
W
W
W
400
1000 at 20 mA, 400 at 20 mA (6.2 mm width)
2.400
Output voltage
Frequency
V
20.9
Output current
for supply voltage
Voltage output 0 ... 10 V, max.
Frequency, max.
mA
mA
21
10
Short-circuit current
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V
Current output, 0 ... 20 mA, passive
Frequency
mA
mA
mA
40
Corresponds to the input current
15
7
Impedance
Output load
Short-circuit resistant
Protection of the outputs
Max. overvoltage at output
V
30
Accuracy
Total error at 23 °C
Active disconnector (frequency)
Active disconnector (U, I)
%
%
0.1
0.11)
Linearity error
Active disconnector (U, I)
Active disconnector (frequency)
%
%
0.02
0.02
Deviation due to ambient
temperature
Active disconnector (frequency)
0 ... 50 Hz: 7.5 mHz/K; 0 ... 100 Hz: 15 mHz/K; 0 ... 1 kHz: 0.15 Hz/K;
0 ... 10 kHz: 1.5 Hz/K
0 ... 10 V: 1.5 mV/K; 0/4 ... 20 mA: 3 µA/K
Width 6.2 mm: 100 ppm/K of measured value
Width 12.5 mm: with load < 600 W: < 50 ppm/K of measured value;
with load ˜ 600 W: < 175 ppm/K of measured value
Active disconnector (U, I)
Passive disconnector
Transmission error
Passive disconnector
Measured value load error
%
0.1
%/W
0.06/100
Limit frequency at 3 dB
Active disconnector (frequency)
Active disconnector (U, I)
Passive disconnector
Hz
Hz
Hz
30
30
50
Rise time (10 to 90 %)
Active disconnector (frequency)
Active disconnector (U, I)
ms
10 + 1 period
10
Settling time
at 1 % accuracy
Active disconnector (frequency)
Active disconnector (U, I)
ms
30 + 1 period
30
Residual ripple
Active disconnector (U, I)
Passive disconnector
mVeff
mVeff
<5
<8
The accuracy refers to the measurement range end value if not otherwise stated.
1) For 3RS17 06: 0.1 % for selected output 4 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected
output 0 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected output 0 ... 10 V and from an input
voltage > 50 mV. For an input voltage < 50 mV, an offset of max. 20 ms is
effective at the output.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
7/113
Interface Converters
3RS17 interface converters
■ Dimensional drawings
12.5 mm design
17.5 mm design
6,2
NSB01359
NSB00272
NSB00271
79 2)
80 3)
6.2 mm design
12,5
84 1)
17,5
1) Width for 3RS17 25 is approx. 90 mm.
2) Dimensions for screw-type connection.
3) Dimensions for spring-loaded terminal.
■ Schematics
3RS17 00-..D..
3RS17 02-..D..
3RS17 03-..D..
3RS17 05-..D..
IN+ 2
3RS17 06- .FD00
NSB01346
3
U, I
4
IN-
U, I, F
1
IN+ 1
OUT
+/~
24 V AC/DC
5
IN-
6
U, I
0V
U, I
2
5
OUT
0V
NSB01315a
+/~
3RS17 06-.FE00
7
8
3RS17 0.-..W00
NSB01318a
IN+ 1
IN-
U, I
U, I
2
+/~
0V
24 V AC/DC
NSB01319a
6
5
OUT+
IN+ 1
OUT-
IN-
U, I,
F
2
8
7
U, I
5
3RS17 25-.FW00
7
NSB01347
+/~
NSB01345
6
U, I
U, I
2
5
8
7
24 V AC/DC
OUT
IN+ 1
0V
IN-
IN-
5
+/~
3
I
U, I
OUT+
OUT-
8
7
24-240 V AC/DC
3RS17 21-.ET00
2
1
6
U, I
2
0V
3RS17 20-.ET00
IN+
OUT-
8
7
3RS17 25-.FD00
IN-
OUT+
24-240 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
IN+ 1
6
I
4
OUT+
IN+ 1
OUT-
NSB01344
IN-
2
3
I
I
4
OUT+
OUT-
NSB01317a
3RS17 22-.ET00
IN+
(1)
ININ+
(2)
IN-
1
2
5
6
3
I
I
I
4
7
I
8
OUT+
(1)
OUTOUT+
(2)
OUT-
NSB01316a
7
7/114
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006